CR Series

Compact Routers and Control Panels

User’s Guide
UG1600-12
30 May 2014
Copyright & Trademark Notice
Copyright © 2014, Belden, Inc.. All rights reserved.
Belden, Belden Sending All The Right Signals, and the Belden logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Belden Inc. or its affiliated companies in the United States and
other jurisdictions. Miranda, NVISION, CR Series and CRSC are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Miranda Technologies Partnership. Belden Inc., Miranda Technologies
Partnership, and other parties may also have trademark rights in other terms used herein.

Terms and Conditions

Please read the following terms and conditions carefully. By using CR Series documentation,
you agree to the following terms and conditions.
Miranda Technologies Partnership (“Miranda”) hereby grants permission and license to
owners of CR Series routers to use their product manuals for their own internal business use.
Manuals for Miranda products may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose
unless specifically authorized in writing by Miranda.
A Miranda manual may have been revised to reflect changes made to the product during its
manufacturing life. Thus, different versions of a manual may exist for any given product. Care
should be taken to ensure that one obtains the proper manual version for a specific product
serial number.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Miranda.
Warranty information is available in the Support section of the Miranda Web site
([Link]).

Title CR Series Routers User’s Guide

Part Number UG1600-12
Revision 3.0 (28 May 14)

ii
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Change History
Rev. Date ECO Description Approved
1.0 03 Apr 06 — Initial Release —
1.1 14 Nov 06 12390 Added material regarding -AES routers, 32×32 D. Cox
routers, network operation, 16×4 router, and 16×4
and 16×2 control panels. Corrected a few problems.
1.2 04 Jan 07 12440 Added material regarding -AV routers, remote panel D. Cox
modules, CRConfig (software), and compact router
networks.
Created button legend templates.
1.3 12 Jul 07 13355 Added material regarding analog audio routers, D. Cox
machine control routers, and “3Gig” routers.
Automation is now possible.
1.4 19 Nov 08 14426 References the CRSC software. Includes new CR D. Cox
Series products. Misc. corrections.
1.5 30 Mar 09 15703 Format change. D. Cox
1.6 12 Oct 09 16114 Added new CR Series products, NV9000 support. D. Cox
2.0 22 Mar 10 16912 Added CQX series. D. Cox
2.1 04 May 10 16993 Added ± 3-line buffer. D. Cox
2.2 18 Aug 10 17186 Short addition regarding 3-line buffer. D. Cox
2.3 30 Mar 12 17286 Added 3Gig routers D. Cox
2.4 15 Nov 13 19037 Improvements to CQX series. [Link]
3.0 28 May 14 19241 New CR6400 family products. [Link]

FCC Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Declaration of Conformance (CE)

All of the equipment described in this manual has been designed to conform with the
required safety and emissions standards of the European Community. Products tested and
verified to meet these standards are marked as required by law with the CE mark.
When shipped into member countries of the European Community, this equipment is
accompanied by authentic copies of original Declarations of Conformance on file in Miranda
USA offices in Grass Valley, California USA.

iii
 Software License Agreement and Warranty Information
Contact Miranda for details on the software license agreement and product warranty.

Important Safeguards and Notices

This section provides important safety guidelines for operators and service personnel.
Specific warnings and cautions appear throughout the manual where they apply. Please
read and follow this important information, especially those instructions related to the risk
of electric shock or injury to persons.

WARNING
Any instructions in this manual that require opening the equipment cover or enclosure are for use by
qualified service personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any service other
than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so.

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHs)

Miranda is in compliance with EU Directive RoHS 2002/95/EC governing the restricted use of
certain hazardous substances and materials in products and in our manufacturing
processes.
Miranda has a substantial program in place for RoHS compliance that includes significant
investment in our manufacturing process, and a migration of Miranda product electronic
components and structural materials to RoHS compliance.
It is our objective at Miranda GVD to maintain compliance with all relevant environmental
and product regulatory requirements. Detailed information on specific products or on the
RoHS program at Miranda is available from Miranda Customer Support at
1-800-719-1900 (toll-free) or
1-530-265-1000 (outside the U.S.).

iv
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Symbols and Their Meanings

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle alerts the
user to the presence of dangerous voltages within the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle alerts the user to the presence
of important operating and maintenance/service instructions.

The Ground symbol represents a protective grounding terminal. Such a terminal

must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connections to the
equipment.

The fuse symbol indicates that the fuse referenced in the text must be replaced
with one having the ratings indicated.

The presence of this symbol in or on Miranda equipment means that it has been
designed, tested and certified as complying with applicable Underwriter’s
Laboratory (USA) regulations and recommendations.

The presence of this symbol in or on Miranda equipment means that it has been
designed, tested and certified as essentially complying with all applicable
European Union (CE) regulations and recommendations.

General Warnings
A warning indicates a possible hazard to personnel which may cause injury or death.
Observe the following general warnings when using or working on this equipment:
• Heed all warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions.
• Do not use this equipment in or near water.
• This equipment is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To
avoid electrical shock, plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before con-
necting the equipment inputs or outputs.
• Route power cords and other cables so they are not likely to be damaged.
• Disconnect power before cleaning the equipment. Do not use liquid or aerosol clean-
ers; use only a damp cloth.
• Dangerous voltages may exist at several points in this equipment. To avoid injury, do
not touch exposed connections and components while power is on.

v
 • Do not wear rings or wristwatches when troubleshooting high current circuits such as
the power supplies.
• To avoid fire hazard, use only the specified fuse(s) with the correct type number, voltage
and current ratings as referenced in the appropriate locations in the service instruc-
tions or on the equipment. Always refer fuse replacements to qualified service person-
nel.
• To avoid explosion, do not operate this equipment in an explosive atmosphere.
• Have qualified service personnel perform safety checks after any service.

General Cautions
A caution indicates a possible hazard to equipment that could result in equipment damage.
Observe the following cautions when operating or working on this equipment:
• When installing this equipment, do not attach the power cord to building surfaces.
• To prevent damage to equipment when replacing fuses, locate and correct the problem
that caused the fuse to blow before re-applying power.
• Use only the specified replacement parts.
• Follow static precautions at all times when handling this equipment.
• This product should only be powered as described in the manual. To prevent equip-
ment damage, select the proper line voltage on the power supply(ies) as described in
the installation documentation.
• To prevent damage to the equipment, read the instructions in the equipment manual
for proper input voltage range selection.
• Some products include a backup battery. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced by a battery of an incorrect type. Dispose of batteries according to instruc-
tions.
• Products that have (1) no on/off switch and (2) use an external power supply must be
installed in proximity to a main power outlet that is easily accessible.

vi
 Table of Contents

1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The PDF Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Control Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CR6400 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Other Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Digital Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CQX Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CR6400 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Analog Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Digital Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Analog Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Machine Control Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1RU Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CQX Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2RU Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The Remote Panel Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1RU Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2RU Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CP6464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Other Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Characteristics of Panels in CRSC Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Characteristics Common to Both Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1RU Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CQX Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2RU Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1RU Remote Panel Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2RU Remote Panel Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

vii
Table of Contents

3 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Stand-Alone Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CRSC Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CR6400 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Router Control Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CR6400 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Other Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installing CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Creating a Router Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
CR6400 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Levels and IP Addresses in CR6400 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Stand-Alone Networks for Other CR Series Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CRSC Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Levels and IP Addresses in CRSC Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CQX Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mode Rotary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Frame ID Rotary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Levels and IP Addresses in NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting Up Your Configuration PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Multiple Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Power-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Stand-Alone Routers (including CR6400 Routers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CR6400 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Stand-Alone Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Further Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CRSC Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Simple Testing with CRSC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Further Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Basic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Bypass Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GPIO Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using CRSC for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NV9000 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Simple Testing with CRSC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Simple Testing under NV9000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Stand-Alone Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IP Addresses and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
CRSC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IP Addresses and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

viii
 CR Series
User’s Guide

NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Router Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Virtual Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Panel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Special Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

5 Operating a Stand-Alone Router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Stand-Alone Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Machine Control Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

6 Operating a Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Machine Control Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

7 Operating a CRSC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CRSC Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

8 Operating in an NV9000 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

ix
Table of Contents

9 Operating CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

10 Operating CR6400 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CR6400 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
For a Single Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
For a Router Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Stand-Alone CR6400 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Stand-Alone CR6400 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Destination Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power Supply LED Does Not Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Noisy Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CQX Routers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Router Functioning Improperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Network Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CRSC Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

x
 CR Series
User’s Guide

12 Technical Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Reference Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Environmental Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Serial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DB25 Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Analog Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Video Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
CQX Routers and Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Default Router State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Default Remote Panel Module State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Initial Control Panel State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Control Panel Configuration in NV9000-SE Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CQX Transition Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

13 Misc. Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

NV9000 Network Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NV9000 Router Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuration Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Lock, Protect, and Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Configuration Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Operational Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
AES Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Loss of Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Analog Audio Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Machine Control Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Power Cord Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

xi
Table of Contents

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Contact Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

xii
 Preface

Chapter 1 provides a brief introduction to the User’s Guide.

Topics
Chapter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The PDF Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Chapter Structure
The following chapters provide detailed instructions for all aspects of Compact Router
operations:
• Chapter 1, Preface, (this chapter) outlines easy ways to use this guide and provides a list of
terms and conventions.
• Chapter 2, Introduction, provides a functional description of the products.
• Chapter 3, Installation, provides installation and connection instructions.
• Chapter 4, Configuration, provides configuration instructions.
• Chapter 5, Operating a Stand-Alone Router, provides operating instructions.
• Chapter 11, Maintenance, provides maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions.
• Chapter 12, Technical Details, provides electrical, video, audio, mechanical, and environmen-
tal specifications, product drawings, and default settings.
• Chapter 13, Misc. Topics, presents a glossary, miscellaneous instructions and information,
and a brief discussion of NV9000 router control systems.
• An Index and Glossary are also provided for your reference.

The PDF Document

This guide is provided in PDF format, allowing you to use Acrobat’s “bookmarks” to navigate to
any desired location. You can also easily print a hardcopy. Please note:
• Use the Table of Contents or the bookmarks page to jump to any desired section.
• Many hyperlinks are provided within the chapters.
• Use the Index to jump to specific topics within a chapter. Each page number in the index is a
hyperlink.
• Use Acrobat’s ‘Go to Previous View’ and ‘Go to Next View’ buttons to retrace your complete
navigational path.

1
Preface
Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations

• Use the ‘First Page’, ‘Previous Page’, and ‘Next Page’, and ‘Last Page’ buttons to go to the first,
previous, next, or last page within a PDF file.

Note
To display the navigation buttons, right-click the Tool Bar area, and check ‘Navigation’.

• Use Acrobat’s extensive search capabilities, such as the ‘Find’ tool and ‘Search’ tool to per-
form comprehensive searches as required.

Terms, Conventions and Abbreviations

The following conventions are used throughout this guide:
• The symbol p denotes either an example or a special message.
• Entries written in bold-face or Capital Letters denote physical control panel buttons, GUI
buttons, or menu items.
Click Apply to ...
Press the SRC 12 button ...
• Button names, menu names, and certain other names are enclosed in single quotation
marks. Double quotation marks enclose informal or colloquial expressions.
The following terms and abbreviations are used throughout this guide:
• The term “control panel” refers to the CR Series control panels (such as the CP3232), and to
NV96xx control panels.
• The term “router” refers to any CR Series compact router, with or without its control panel. If
a distinction is required, it will be made.
• The term “remote panel module” refers to the CR Series RP16 and RP32. The legend on each
of those products is “Remote Panel Module.” The remote panel modules are also called
remote panel expansion kits in the sales literature.
• The term “remote panel” refers to a control panel mounted on a remote panel module.
• The term “captive panel” refers to a control panel mounted on a router. They are not config-
urable and do not have the capabilities of remote panels, but are useful for some purposes.
• The term “frame” refers to any CR Series router or remote panel module.
• “High tally” means that a button is brightly illuminated.
• “Low tally” means that a button is illuminated at low intensity. Most buttons assume a low
tally state until selected.
• The terms “machine control router” and “port router” have the same meaning.
• The term “3Gig” describes Miranda devices capable of operating at HD rates and also at
2.97 Gb/s or 2.966 Gb/s1.
• The term CRSC refers to configuration software, the Compact Router System Configurator.
• The term CRConfig refers to obsolete configuration software.
• The term “CQX” represents the “clean and quiet” compact routers and panels.

1. 2.97 / 1.001

2
 Introduction

Chapter 2 provides a functional description of the products.

Topics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Overview
Summary
CR Series products include 1RU and 2RU routers, control panels, and “remote panel modules.”
The CR Series includes video and audio routers in several formats, and machine control routers.
These are the 1RU compact routers and matching control panels:

1RU Routers Corresponding 1RU Control Panel

CR0808-3Gig 8×8, “3Gig” digital video CP0808 8×8, with 6 function
CR0808-HD 8×8, high definition digital video buttons
CR0808-SD 8×8, standard definition digital video
CR0808-AES 8×8, AES3id digital audio
CR0808-HD-NR 8×8, HD video, non-reclocking
CR0808-SD-NR 8×8, SD video, non-reclocking
CR0808-AA 8×8, analog audio
CR0808-AV 8×8, analog video
CR1616-3Gig 16×16, “3Gig” digital video CP1616 16×16, with 6 function
CR1616-HD 16×16, high definition digital video buttons
CR1616-SD 16×16, standard definition digital
CR1616-AES video
16×16, AES3id digital audio
CR16-PR 16-port machine control
CR1616-HD-NR 16×16, HD video, non-reclocking
CR1616-SD-NR 16×16, SD video, non-reclocking
CR1616-AA 16×16, analog audio
CR1616-AV 16×16, analog video

3
Introduction
Overview

CR1604-3Gig 16×4, “3Gig” digital video CP1604 16×4, with 6 function

CR1604-HD 16×4, high definition digital video CP1602 buttons
CR1604-SD 16×4, standard definition digital video 16×2, with 6 function
CR1604-AES 16×4, AES3id digital audio buttons
CR1604-HD-NR 16×4, HD video, non-reclocking
CR1604-SD-NR 16×4, SD video, non-reclocking
CR1604-AA 16×4, analog audio
CR1604-AV 16×4, analog video
CR1602-3Gig-CQX 16×2, “3Gig” digital video CP1602-CQX 16 × (2 + 6), with 4 tran-
CR1602-HD-CQX 16×2, high definition digital video sition type buttons, 3
CR1602-SD-CQX 16×2, standard definition digital video transition rate buttons,
and 7 function buttons
(5 undefined).

These are the 2RU compact routers and matching control panels:

2RU Routers Corresponding 2RU Control Panel

CR3232-3Gig 32×32, “3Gig” digital video CP3232 32×32, with 12 function buttons
CR3232-HD 32×32, high definition digital video
CR3232-SD 32×32, standard definition digital
CR3232-AES video
32×32, AES3id digital audio
CR32-PR 32-port machine control
CR3232-HD-NR 32×32, HD video, non-reclocking
CR3232-SD-NR 32×32, SD video, non-reclocking
CR3232-AA 32×32, analog audio
CR3232-AV 32×32, analog video
CR3204-3Gig 32×4, “3Gig” digital video CP3204 32×4, with 12 function buttons
CR3204-HD 32×4, high definition digital video
CR3204-SD 32×4, standard definition digital video
CR3204-AES 32×4, AES3id digital audio
CR3204-HD-NR 32×4, HD video, non-reclocking
CR3204-SD-NR 32×4, SD video, non-reclocking
CR3204-AA 32×4, analog audio
CR3204-AV 32×4, analog video
CR6464-3Gig 64×64 video router CP6464 64×64, with 12 function buttons
CR6464-AES 64×64 AES3id router

The CP3201 (a 1RU panel) is special case not listed in the tables above: it controls 32 sources and
1 destination. It does not “correspond” to any router and is used only in a CRSC Network. (See
page 73.)
The CR6400 family products (the CR6464-3Gig, CR6464-AES, and the CP6464) are designed to
work together and do not interoperate with other routers and panels in the CR Series.
These are the remote panel modules:

Remote Panel Modules Corresponding Control Panel

RP16 1RU CP1616, CP1604, 16×16, 16×4, 16×2, with 6 function buttons.
CP1602, CP3201 (The CP3201 is a 1RU panel.)
RP32 2RU CP3232, CP3204 32×32, 32×4 with 12 function buttons.

4
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Routers
The 16×16 routers can switch any of 16 inputs to any of 16 outputs and the 32×32 routers can
switch any of 32 inputs to any of 32 outputs. The 8×8 routers switch 8 inputs to 8 outputs. The
16×4 routers switch 16 inputs to 4 outputs. The 32×4 routers switch 32 inputs to 4 outputs.

Machine Control Routers

With the exception of the machine control routers (CR16-PR and CR32-PR), all the compact
routers are X/Y routers having n × m crosspoint matrices. An input can be routed to any or all of
the outputs.
The machine control routers (also called port routers) are point-to-point routers. An input can be
connected to at most one output. (The connections are RS-422 and bidirectional, typically with
commands in one direction and responses in the other direction.)

“Clean and Quiet” Routers

Each of the 3 “clean and quiet” (CQX) router models routes 16 inputs to 2 “clean and quiet”
outputs or to 6 auxiliary (normal) outputs. For the clean and quiet outputs, the router performs
smooth transitions. The transitions are governed by transition type and transition rate, select-
able on the CP1602-CQX control panel. The CQX routers also provide 2 bypass inputs. The 2
clean and quiet outputs switch to the bypass inputs if the router loses power. There are no 2RU
clean and quiet routers at present. The CQX routers also provide a GPIO connector, supporting
16 inputs and 4 outputs. The inputs each select one of the video inputs for CQ output 1 and the
outputs signal alarms and status. See GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers on
page 123 for details.

CR6400 Routers
The CR6400 family is a unique subset of the Miranda’s CR series of compact routers: the family’s
routers have a larger switching matrix (64×64) and modular construction. The family includes
two routers and a control panel.
• CR6464-3Gig — a 2RU 64×64 video router
• CR6464-AES — a 2RU 64×64 AES router
• CP6464 — a 2RU 64×64 control panel
The CR6400 routers have removable control cards, crosspoint cards, and a removable fan tray.
Because they are removable, they are field-serviceable.
Each router has 4 removable I/O cards. If a router is populated with one or more AES cards, it is
considered a CR6464-AES. If a router is populated with one or more 3Gig cards, it is considered a
CR6464-3Gig. If a router has no I/O cards, it is considered “undefined.”
The CR6400 family products work together and do not interoperate (yet) with other CR Series
products. Therefore, the CR6400 family routers should not be mixed (on the same subnet) with
other CR Series routers and panels.

Control Panels
A CR Series control panel mounts on the front of a router or on the front of a remote panel
module and provides direct visual and tactile control of the router or routers connected to the
remote panel module. (You can install or uninstall one easily in a few seconds.) However, any of

5
Introduction
Overview

the routers can also operate without a control panel, under network control or through
automation.
The CP3201 is special case: it is a 1 RU panel that controls 32 sources and 1 destination. It does
not mount on the front of a router and is used only in a CRSC Network. (See page 73.)
The CP1602-CQX is also a special case: it is a 1RU control panel used in conjunction with any of
the CQX routers. This panel has 16 source buttons, 2 “clean and quiet” destination buttons, 6
auxiliary destination buttons, 4 transition type buttons, 3 transition rate buttons, and 7 function
buttons (5 undefined).
The CP6464 mounts on, and controls, only CR6400 routers.

Remote Panel Modules

A “remote panel module” is a device that sends control messages to a network of routers (and
receives status messages from the routers in the network). A remote panel module receives take
and lock commands from an attached control panel and must have a control panel attached to
be useful. We say the panel module is “remote” because it and its control panel can be located
apart from the routers (from a few inches to several hundred meters, subject to cable
limitations).
A remote panel module can be configured to operate (with its mounted control panel) as either
(1) a CRSC remote panel or (2) an NV9000 panel in a system controlled by an NV9000 router
control system.
When it is set up for use as a CRSC panel, it is configured in CRSC. When it is set up for use as an
NV9000 panel, it must be configured in NV9000-SE Utilities.
 CRSC is the Compact Router System Configurator. See CRSC on page 44 for information.
 Please also refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide (or the NV9000-SE Utilities help
system).

Usage
There are several different ways to use compact routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single stand-alone CQX router with a “captive” CQX control panel or with automation.
• A CQX router with a remote CQX control panel.
 A captive panel is one attached directly to a router. A remote panel is one mounted on a
remote panel module.
 Automation is up to the customer.
Routers and remote panel modules come from the factory ready for stand-alone operation.
They must be configured for use either in a CRSC network or in an NV9000 network. Once
configured, they must be reset to work in stand-alone mode.

6
 CR Series
User’s Guide

A remote panel module must be configured to work either in a CRSC network or in an NV9000
network. The two configuration modes are not compatible.

Stand-Alone Routers
Figure 2-1 compares a stand-alone router with a captive panel to a stand-alone router network
with remote panel modules:
Remote Panel 1

Standalone Router and Remote Panel 2

“Captive” Control Panel

Networked Routers
with Remote Panels
Ethernet Switch

Router 1
PC
Router 2

Router 3

Router 4
Fig. 2-1: Standalone Router vs. a Network of Routers

CRSC Network
A CRSC network has the same topology as a stand-alone network, except (1) the routers and
remote panel modules have been configured under CRSC which provides a more elegant solu-
tion to system design.
Figure 2-2 shows a sample NV9000 network, one of several possible topologies:
Remote Panel 1
Ethernet

P/R Net 1
Remote Panel 2
NV9000
P/R Net 2
House Net
Ethernet

Router 1

Router 2
Config
PC
•••

•••

Router n
Fig. 2-2: NV9000 Network of Routers

7
Introduction
Overview

NV9000 Networks
An NV9000 network supports a larger number of routers. Commands issue from the remote
panels to the NV9000 which then dispatches the instructions to the routers. The routers return
status to the NV9000 which in turn relays the status to the remote panels.
CR Series routers can be used with an NV9000 router control system. These router control
systems extend the capabilities of the compact routers.
An NV9000 network is constructed and operated according to the requirements of the NV9000
router control system. Configuration and control of the routers is entirely within the scope of
NV9000-SE Utilities, although you can use CRSC to designate IP addresses. See NV9000 Router
Control Systems (page 168) and Compact Routers in an NV9000 System (page 169).

CQX Networks
Figure 2-3 shows the ways a “clean and quiet” router can be connected:
CQX Router
Config Local CQX Panel
PC
Ethernet
Remote CQX Panel

Fig. 2-3: CQX Network

At present, the CQX connections are limited. One CQX router with a local (or captive) CQX panel
or a remote CQX panel (or both) can exist on any subnet. (You can have more than one subnet,
however.)
At present there is little to configure other than the IP address of the router (and possibly the
remote panel module).

CR6400 Networks
The CR6400 routers, at first release, operates only in stand-alone mode (also known as “default”
mode) either as a single router or in a small network.
Figure 2-4 compares a stand-alone router with a captive panel to a stand-alone router network
with remote panel modules:

Single Standalone Router and

“Captive” Control Panel
Ethernet
Multiple Standalone Routers
and “Captive” Control Panel
Fig. 2-4: CR6400 Usage
Up to 4 CR6400 routers may be controlled with a single CP6464.

8
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Software
CRSC (Compact Router System Configurator) is a configuration and monitoring tool for compact
routers and remote panels. Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for details.

Benefits
The CR Series Compact Routers offer these benefits:
• Miranda performance and quality.
• Very simple operation.
• Low cost.
• Small form factor.
• Easy migration to larger systems.

The Routers
CR6400 Routers
The CR6400 routers are about 10” deep. The 2 models in the family are visually identical, except
for the legend on the I/O cards (3Gig or AES) at the rear.
Figures 2-7 and 2-6 show front and rear views of the CR6400 routers.

Fig. 2-5: Front View of the CR6400 Digital Router

Fig. 2-6: Rear View of the CR6400 Router (CR6464-3Gig shown)

Other Routers
The routers are slim (35–57mm or 1.38”–2.25”) and mechanically similar, differing principally in
the number and type of connectors. The fronts of all the 1RU routers are the same except for
their legends and the fronts of all the 2RU routers are the same except for their legends.
The 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and analog video routers have BNC connectors. The analog audio routers
have DB25 connectors (and fans). The machine control routers have RJ-45 connectors.

9
Introduction
Overview

Figures 2-7 through 2-17 show front and rear views of the routers.

Fig. 2-7: Front View of the CR1616-SD Digital Video Router

Fig. 2-8: Rear View of the 16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES Routers

Fig. 2-9: Front View of the CR3232-HD Digital Video Router

Fig. 2-10: Rear View of the 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES Routers

Fig. 2-11: Rear View of the CR1616-AV Analog Video Router

Fig. 2-12: Rear View of the CR3232-AV Analog Video Router

Fig. 2-13: Rear View of the CR1616-AA Analog Audio Router

10
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Fig. 2-14: Rear View of the CR3232-AA Analog Audio Router

Fig. 2-15: Rear View of the CR16-PR Machine Control Router

Fig. 2-16: Rear View of the CR32-PR Machine Control Router

Fig. 2-17: Rear View of the 16×2 CQX Routers (3Gig, HD, or SD)
Some routers (e.g., the CR3204-AA or the CR0808-3Gig) have fewer input or output connectors
than shown here.
All compact routers save their state in non-volatile memory. Thus, if a power loss occurs, a router
can recover almost instantly. All compact routers require a few seconds to initialize.
All compact routers have an automation port (DE9, RS-422 or RS-485).
All compact routers except machine control routers accept these video reference rates:
Composite HD Tri-level
525i / 59.94 720p / 23.98 1080i / 47.95 1080p / 23.98
(NTSC) 720p / 24 1080i / 48 1080p / 24
625i / 50 720p / 25 1080i / 50 1080p / 25
(PAL) 720p / 29.97 1080i / 59.94 1080p / 29.97
720p / 30 1080i / 60 1080p / 30
720p / 50 1080p / 50
720p / 59.94 1080p / 59.94
720p / 60 1080p / 60

The machine control routers do not receive video reference signals.

11
Introduction
Overview

Digital Video Routers

(See CQX Video Routers on page 13 for a discussion of the CQX routers.)
(See CR6400 Routers on page 16 for a discussion of the CR6400 routers.)
Other digital video routers are discussed here.
The 1RU digital video routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoint matrices, depending on the
model. The 2RU digital video routers have either 32×32 or 32×4 crosspoint matrices.
Figure 2-18 shows a simplified view of the digital video router:
M Crosspoint N
M = 8, 16, 32, or 64
Switch
Inputs Outputs N = 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64
(Equalized) (Reclocked)
Automation
μP Logic
Ethernet
Video Refer-
ence
Control (optional)
Panel
Fig. 2-18: Block Diagram of the Digital Video Router
The video routers perform input equalization and, except for the -NR models, perform
reclocking of outputs. The -NR models do not perform reclocking. Router outputs are switched
in sync with an external video reference if it is present.
All digital video routers accept bi-level or tri-level video references (sync) and switch according
to SMPTE RP168-2002.

3Gig and HD Video Routers

All of the “3Gig” routers support 2.966Gb/s, and 2.97Gb/s video rates as well as a number of HD
bit rates and formats. The 3Gig routers reclock at 270Mb/s, 1.483Gb/s, 1.485Gb/s, 2.966Gb/s,
and 2.97Gb/s. The 3Gig routers bypass re-clocking for other rates. Video references must be
nominally 800mV p-p and bi-level or tri-level in nature.
All of the “HD” routers are SWB (super wide band) routers: they support a wide range of SD and
HD bit rates and formats, from 10Mbps to 1.5Gbps. With the exception of the -NR routers, the
HD routers reclock at 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540Mb/s and 1.483 and 1.485Gb/s and bypass re-
clocking for other rates. Video references must be nominally 800mV p-p and bi-level or tri-level
in nature. The HD routers support DVB-ASI signals.

SD Video Routers
All of the “SD” routers support a wide range of SD serial data rates from 10Mb/s to 540MB/s.
With the exception of the -NR routers, the SD routers reclock at 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540Mb/s.
The SD routers support DVB-ASI signals.

NR Video Routers
The HD and SD routers are available in non-reclocking models, such as the CR1616-HD-NR and
CR3204-SD-NR. These models are less expensive than the models that have reclocking circuitry
and work well with relatively noise-free signals. The reclocking models give better performance
in noisy environments.

12
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Digital Video Formats

The digital video routers (other than CQX routers) perform video processing for these rates:
Video Format Bit Rate Remarks
1080p, 60 Hz 2.97 Gb/s 3Gig
1080p, 59.94 Hz 2.96 Gb/s
1080p, 30 Hz 2.97 Gb/s
1080p, 29.97 Hz 2.96 Gb/s
1080p, 25 Hz 2.97 Gb/s
1080p, 24 Hz 2.97 Gb/s
1080p, 23.98 Hz 2.96 Gb/s
1080i, 60 Hz 1.485 Gb/s HD
1080i, 59.94 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
1080i, 50 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
1080psf, 30 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
1080psf, 29.97 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
1080psf, 24 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
1080psf, 23.98 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
720p, 60 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
720p, 59.94 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
720p, 50 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
720p, 30 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
720p, 29.97 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
720p, 25 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
720p, 24 Hz 1.485 Gb/s
720p, 23.98 Hz 1.483 Gb/s
625i, 50 Hz 270 Mb/s SD
525i, 59.94 Hz 270 Mb/s

The 3Gig routers can receive all rates listed for HD and SD. The HD routers can also receive video
at SD rates.

CQX Video Routers

These 1RU “clean and quiet” video routers switch 16 inputs to 2 “clean and quiet” outputs and 6
auxiliary outputs.
The CQX routers have two crosspoint matrices. The first crosspoint routes 16 normal inputs
either to an internal mixer or to the second crosspoint matrix.
The mixer has 2 channels. Each channel mixes two inputs and produces an internal “clean”
output. One of the inputs is the signal previously routed to that channel and the other input is
the signal that will be routed to that channel. The mixer produces the transition between the
previous input and the next input according to the transition type and transition rate currently
selected (at a control panel) for the router.

13
Introduction
Overview

For the SD and HD CQX routers, each input supports video plus 16 embedded audio channels.
The mixer transitions both the video and the audio without artifacts.
The 3Gig router supports both level A and level B of the SMPTE 425M standard. The mixer transi-
tions signals of level A, at 1080p, video and audio without artifacts. It handles level B — two
1080i signals in one stream — somewhat differently. It mixes the 16 audio channels of “link A”
(from the two inputs) but passes the 16 audio channels of link B (from the two inputs) through
to the output unmixed. “Link B” will undergo a cut transition with possible audio artifacts.
Although audio for Link B is not processed and undergoes a cut transition, video for Link B is
mixed according to the transition type and rate selected on the CQX control panel.
 The 3Gig routers do not accept level B’s 2×720p signals at present.
The second crosspoint matrix receives internal signals and produces the CQX outputs 1 and 2
and the 6 auxiliary outputs (which are normal outputs). A multiplexer selects either the clean
output or the emergency bypass input. The emergency bypass input is selected only when
power fails. (The multiplexer is controlled by a relay that switches to its relaxed position when
power fails.)
The router has 16 normal input BNCs, 2 bypass input BNCs, 2 CQX output BNCs, and 6 aux
output BNCs.
Figure 2-19 shows a simplified view of the CQX digital video router:
clean 1
Mix 1 Reclock
CQX 1
clean 2 Em. Bypass 1
Mix 2
16
6 Reclock
Inputs CQX 2
(Equalized) Em. Bypass 2
2 non-sync
bypass 6
Reclock Aux Outputs

Automation
μP Logic Video Reference
Ethernet
GPIO
Control (optional)
Panel
Fig. 2-19: Block Diagram of the CQX Digital Video Router
The video routers perform input equalization and perform reclocking of outputs. Router
outputs are switched in sync with an external video reference if it is present. The video reference
also provides sync for embedded audio.
All CQX video routers accept bi-level or tri-level video references (sync) and switch according to
SMPTE RP168-2002.
The CQX video routers also provide a bypass path for non-synchronous input signals. If the two
sources chosen for a clean and quiet switch are not of the same format, are off-rate, are not at
the same frame rate as the video reference, or do not meet the timing window (± 3 lines), the
video processor enters non-sync bypass mode where the source signal bypasses the video
processor and goes straight to the outputs. Thus, the clean and quiet output behaves like an aux
output in which there is no video or audio processing — with no transition processing. Switches

14
 CR Series
User’s Guide

still occur at the specified switchpoint for the video reference, but they will not be “clean and
quiet.”
However, if there is no video reference present, the CQX does the cut to the new source as soon
as it receives the command from the control panel and does not wait for the switchpoint.
Where one or both of the sources is off-rate or at a frame rate different from that of the video
reference, the output will bypass the video processor.
If a clean and quiet output is in a non-sync state but conditions change so that a clean switch is
possible, the processor waits for one frame of video before switching to processed video to
ensure that the processed video has enough time to pass through the video processing path.
The CQX video routers have a removable fan unit. The fan unit is not visible when a CQX panel is
mounted on the router.

Recessed Fan unit 16-pos Mode Switch

16-pos Frame ID Switch
Fig. 2-20: Front View of the CQX Video Router
Customers should have no reason to remove the fan unit.
The CQX video routers have a “mode” switch in addition to the 16-position frame ID switch. Both
are 16-position rotary switches that turn with a small screwdriver. The “mode” switch configures
the video format of the router. See CQX Routers on page 79 for details.
Set the rotary switch to a position in the range 0–9, A, B, C, or D, according to this table:
Setting Format Setting Format
0 1080i, 59.94 or 60 6 1080p, 59.94 or 60 Switch positions 6 and 7
1080p, 29.97 or 30 correspond to video accord-
7 1080p, 50
1080psf, 29.97 or 30
8 2 × 1080i, 59.94 or 60 ing to SMPTE 425 level A.
1 1080i, 50 9 2 × 1080i, 50 Switch positions 8 and 9
1080p, 25 correspond to video accord-
A 720p, 29.97 or 30
1080psf, 25 ing to SMPTE 425 level B.
B 720p, 25
2 525i, 59.94 C 720p, 23.98 or 24
3 625i, 50 D 1080p, 23.98 or 24,
4 720p, 59.94 or 60 1080psf, 23.98 or 24

5 720p, 50 E reserved
F reserved

The default is 1080i, 59.94 Hz (switch setting 0). Positions E and F are not valid positions.
Where a switch setting supports multiple formats, the format is governed by the video reference
applied to the router and must be compatible with that reference format.
The CQX routers enter non-sync bypass mode for signals at other rates.
 When a control panel is mounted on a router or remote panel module, it conceals the rotary
switch. You must remove the control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
 Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

15
Introduction
Overview

CR6400 Routers
Note: you can also refer to the CR6400 Family Users Guide.
The CR Series routers are 2RU routers. They are about 10” deep to accommodate removable I/O
cards. This is a front view of the router:

Power
LEDs

(Removable) Fan Unit Fan LED Rotary Switch

Connector Cover Plate
Reference LED
The CR6464-3Gig and the CR6464-AES routers have the same features at the front. The two
routers are distinguished, at the rear, by the labeling on their I/O cards.
The router’s fan module is removable through the front of the router.
At the rear, the CR Series routers have 4 slots for removable I/O cards, and slots for a crosspoint
card and a control card (also called a CPU card).
Crosspoint Card Control Card Power (2)

I/O Card
Slots (4) Ground
Lug

Each I/O card has 32 ports. There are 16 input ports on the left (as you face the rear of the router)
and 16 outputs on the right. The connectors for both the 3Gig card and the AES card are DIN 1.0/
2.3 connectors (which we usually call “coax” connectors).
At this revision, the router must contain only 3Gig cards or only AES cards. It may contain from 1
to 4 cards. If the router is populated with 3Gig cards, the router is considered a CR6464-3Gig and
switches video. If the router is populated with AES cards, the router is considered a CR6464-AES
and switches audio. A router having no cards is considered of “undefined” type.
Figure 2-18 shows a simplified block diagram of a CR Series router:
64 Crosspoint 64
Switch
Inputs Outputs
(Equalized) (Reclocked)
Automation
μP Logic
Ethernet
Video
Reference
Control (optional)
Panel
Fig. 2-21: Block Diagram of the CR Series

16
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Analog Video Routers

The 1RU analog video routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoints. The 2RU analog video
routers have either 32×32 or 32×4 crosspoints.
Figure 2-22 shows a simplified view of an analog video router:
M Crosspoint N
M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs N = 4, 8, 16, or 32

Automation
μP Logic
Ethernet
Video Refer-
ence
Control (optional)
Panel
Fig. 2-22: Block Diagram of the Analog Video Router
The analog video routers switch NTSC (525i) or PAL (625i) video signals. The router outputs are
switched in sync with an external video reference if it is present.

Digital Audio Routers

(See CR6400 Routers on page 16 for a discussion of the CR6400 family’s AES router. This section
does not apply to the CR6400 family.)
Other digital audio routers are discussed here.
The 1RU AES routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoints. The 2RU AES routers have either
32×32 or 32×4 (stereo) crosspoints.
Figure 2-23 is a simplified view of an AES router:

M Crosspoint N
M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs N = 4, 8, 16, or 32

Automation
μP Logic
Ethernet
Video Refer-
ence
Control (optional)
Panel
Fig. 2-23: Block Diagram of the AES Router
If a video reference is present, the router is considered “synchronous” and regenerates output at
48kHz (nominally). The routers also perform a certain amount of signal processing if the input is
synchronous. If a video reference is not present, the router is asynchronous and passes input
signals straight through without any processing.
In synchronous mode, the router can perform mono routing, in which case, the maximum
number of signals is 2N, that is 8, 16, 32, or 64. In asynchronous mode, the router processes AES
stereo pairs.

17
Introduction
Overview

The “AES” routers switch AES3id audio. The AES routers switch in sync with a video reference if
one is present.
The two AES modes have different functional characteristics:
• Synchronous mode.
This mode is intended for 48kHz input. However, the router accepts input from 32kHz to
192kHz. The router produces AES3id output at 48kHz using adds and drops,1 as required. If
the input itself is locked to the video reference, no adds or drops occur.
The 16×16 router supports either 16×16 stereo switching or 32×32 mono channel switching
(when controlled by an external control system). The 32×32 router supports either 32×32
stereo switching or 64×64 mono channel switching (when controlled by an external control
system). Refer to AES Routers on page 171 for more information.
 A control panel cannot and does not perform mono switching. It is only in external soft-
ware (CRSC, CRConfig, NV9000, or third-party software) that you can do that and then
only when the router is in synchronous mode (i.e., has a video reference).
• Asynchronous mode.
The router passes the input stream (32kHz–192kHz) transparently to the output with no
audio processing. The output is the same as the input and the output rate is the same as the
input rate.
Because the router does no audio processing, it performs stereo switching only.
AES routers power up in asynchronous mode. If a video reference is present, the router immedi-
ately switches to synchronous mode. If no video reference is present, the router stays in
asynchronous mode.
If a video reference is applied at any time after power-up, the router immediately switches from
asynchronous to synchronous mode.

IMPORTANT
When the router is in synchronous mode, and video reference is lost, the router waits 15
minutes (a “grace” period) before reverting to asynchronous mode. If you need to
switch from synchronous mode to asynchronous mode in less than 15 minutes, you can
cycle power to the router with the video reference disconnected.

1. When the source and output AES streams are not in sync, AES samples arrive at a rate different from the
rate at which they leave the router. Add: when the source is slower than the output, router software oc-
casionally inserts an extra copy of the most recent sample in the output stream until the source and
output are back in sync. Drop: when the source is faster than the output, software occasionally does not
send the sample(s) to the output until the source and output are back in sync again. Adds and drops are
performed on a minute scale, never in large blocks, keeping perceptible distortions to a minimum.

18
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Analog Audio Routers

The 1RU analog audio routers have 16×16, 16×4, or 8×8 crosspoints. The 2RU analog audio
routers have either 32×32 or 32×4 (stereo) crosspoints. Figure 2-22 shows a simplified view of
the analog video router:

M Crosspoint N M = 8, 16 or 32
Switch
Inputs Outputs N = 4, 8, 16, or 32

Automation
μP Logic
Ethernet
Video Refer-
ence
Control (optional)
Panel
Fig. 2-24: Block Diagram of the Analog Audio Router
The analog audio routers switch analog audio signals. Router outputs are switched in sync with
an external video reference if the reference is present and are switched asynchronously if no
reference is present.
The analog audio router passes input signals transparently to the output with no audio
processing or adjustments.
 Although the analog audio routers signals are stereo, the connectors are labeled as if the
signals were mono. A 16×16 router shows inputs and outputs numbered 1–32. A 32×32
router shows inputs and outputs numbered 1–64. An 8×8 router shows inputs and outputs
numbered 1–16.

Machine Control Routers

The machine control routers do not have X/Y crosspoints per se, but allow point-to-point
connections. One input may connect to (at most) one output.
The 1RU machine control router has 16 bidirectional serial ports (RJ-45). The 2RU machine
control router has 32. Figure 2-22 shows a simplified view of the machine control router:
N Crosspoint N = 16 or 32
Ports
Switch

Automation
μP Logic
Ethernet

Control (optional)
Panel

Fig. 2-25: Block Diagram of the Machine Control Router

Machine routers channel serial data, typically commands in one direction and responses in the
other direction. Because the connections are bidirectional, a port is both an input and an
output.

19
Introduction
Overview

The machine control routers are defined as “data reverse” routers. Each port can be configured
as dynamic, master, slave, controlling, or controlled. Either CRConfig or CRSC is a requirement for
configuring the ports.
The machine control routers support serial communication up to 1 Mb/s.

Background Information
A device can be considered a “controlled” device or a “controlling” device.
Controlling device Compact Router Controlled device

SRC DST

Above, the source device is a controlling device. A destination can also be the controlling
device:
Controlled device Compact Router Controlling device

SRC DST

A controlling device sends commands to a controlled device. The controlled device passes
responses (such as status) back to the controlling device. A source device can be a controlling
device or a controlled device. A destination device can be a controlling device or a controlled
device.
 Some external devices must be placed in “remote” mode to work with a port router.
A controlling port is one connected to a controlling device.
A controlled port is one connected to a controlled device.
The compact machine control routers operate in “data reverse” mode. This means that in any
connection, the destination device is the controlling device by default. The default can be over-
ridden by port type.
The 5 port types are variations of “controlled” or “controlling”:
Controlling Master Dynamic
Controlled Slave

Controlling or Controlled
These port settings fix the direction of the router port to “controlling” or “controlled.” The port’s
connection for Tx and Rx — made during configuration — is static and does not change during
operation.

Dynamic
A dynamic port can be a controlling or controlled port depending on whether it is connected to
a master port or slave port. The port’s configuration is dynamic and can change during
operation.
Dynamic ports are typically assigned to VTRs.

20
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Master or Slave
Any dynamic port connected to a “master” port will be changed to a controlled port. A “slave”
port is the opposite of a “master” port: any dynamic port connected to a slave port will be
changed to a controlling port.
The compact router applies logic to the port direction setting when a master port is connected
to a dynamic port. In this case, the machine at the dynamic port is always controlled and the
machine at the master port is always controlling.

Configuration
Configuring the ports of a machine control router requires CRSC.

The Control Panels

Control panels are optional if you have an automation system.

1RU Panels
The CP1616 control panel has 38 buttons:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

Level
Selection

Fig. 2-26: Front view of the CP1616 Control Panel

The CP1604 control panel resembles the CP1616, but it has 4 buttons in the lower row on the
left, instead of 16. The CP1602 has 2 buttons in the lower row on the left.
The CP0808 has 2 rows of 8 buttons at the far left.
In stand-alone systems, a CP1616 has 16 source selection buttons, 16 destination selection
buttons, the 2 lock buttons shown, and 4 level selection buttons (as shown).
In a CRSC system, all buttons except the lock buttons (shown) are configurable. In an NV9000
system, all buttons are configurable, including the lock buttons.
 You can mount a 1RU panel on any 1RU router or remote panel module.
The CP3201 is a 1RU panel that resembles the CP1616, but it has 32 source buttons (in 2 rows of
16) and no destination buttons. The CP3201 cannot be used as a captive panel. Its design
requires a CRSC or NV9000 network.

CQX Panel
The CP1602-CQX is also a 1RU control panel that has 38 buttons:
Inputs (16) Destination Lock Panel Lock

CQ Outputs Aux Outputs Transition Transition (unused)

Fig. 2-27: Front view of the CP1602-CQX Control Panel

21
Introduction
Overview

The CP1602-CQX control panel has 16 source buttons, 2 CQX destination buttons, 6 auxiliary
destination buttons, 4 transition type buttons, 3 transition rate buttons, and 7 function buttons.
Of the function buttons, 5 are presently disabled, reserved for future use, and two are active. The
active buttons are ‘Destination Lock’ and ‘Panel Lock’.

2RU Panels
CP6464
The CP6464 control panel is (at present) used exclusively with the CR6400 family routers:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

Level
Selection

Src, Dst
Modes

Fig. 2-28: Front view of the CP6464 Control Panel

A CP6464 has 64 general selection buttons, the 2 lock buttons shown, 4 level selection buttons
(as shown), a ‘SRC’ button and a ‘DST’ button.
The ‘SRC’ button places the panel in source mode, during which time operators may select a
source from the array of 64 selection buttons. Similarly, the ‘DST’ button places the panel in
destination mode, during which time operators may select a destination from the 64 selection
buttons.
There are two lock buttons (at the top right):
• Panel Lock. Protects the state of the entire panel.
• Destination Lock. Protects one or more destinations.
 Buttons are not labeled at the factory. If you want button legends, you must create your
own. See Button Legends on page 72.
A panel’s buttons have color: green, amber, or red. Green usually means source and amber
usually means destination. Red is usually a warning of some kind. For instance, the buttons for
locked destinations appear red.
Buttons go high-tally (bright) when selected (pressed) and remain low-tally (dim) when they are
not selected. The function buttons vary in color.
• Unused function buttons are not illuminated.
• The panel lock button, normally low-tally green, goes high tally red when the panel is
locked.
• The destination lock button, normally amber, goes high tally red when the currently selected
destination is locked. When a destination is locked, the destination button goes high tally
red as a warning if you press it. The button color of locked destinations varies with the type
of system.
The CR6400 products, including the CP6464, presently operate in stand-alone mode only.

22
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Other 2RU Panels

The CP3232 control panel has 76 buttons:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

Level
Selection

Fig. 2-29: Front view of the CP3232 Control Panel

The CP3204 control panel resembles the CP3232, but it has 4 buttons in the lower section on the
left, instead of 32.
In stand-alone systems, a CP3232 has 32 source selection buttons, 32 destination selection
buttons, the 2 lock buttons shown, and 4 level selection buttons (as shown).
In a CRSC system, all buttons except the lock buttons (shown) are configurable. In an NV9000
system, all buttons are configurable, including the lock buttons.
 You can mount a 2RU panel on any 2RU router or remote panel module.
Except under NV9000 control, all control panels have two lock buttons (at the top right):
• Panel Lock. Protects the state of the entire panel.
• Destination Lock. Protects one or more destinations.
 Buttons are not labeled at the factory. If you want button legends, you must create your
own. See Button Legends on page 72.
A panel’s buttons have color: green, amber, red. In a CRSC system, the colors green and amber
have no particular meaning. In a CRSC system, the labels ‘Source’ and ‘Dest’ that you see on the
panel front also have no particular meaning. Any button, regardless of color or position—
except for the lock buttons — can be a source, a destination, or have any assignable function.
In stand-alone systems, green means source and amber means destination and the labels
‘Source’ and ‘Dest’ do have meaning. The group of buttons labeled ‘Source’ are (green) source
buttons and the group of buttons labeled ‘Dest’ are (amber) destination buttons.
In CRSC or NV9000 systems, the color of the button means little.
Buttons go high-tally (bright) when selected (pressed) and remain low-tally (dim) when they are
not selected.
For all but machine control routers, source buttons represent inputs and destination buttons
represent outputs. For machine control routers, a port is both an input and an output. Source
button n and destination button n both represent port n.
The function buttons vary in color.
• Unused function buttons are not illuminated.
• The panel lock button, normally low-tally green, goes high tally red when the panel is
locked.
• The destination lock button, normally amber, goes high tally red when the currently selected
destination is locked. When a destination is locked, the destination button goes high tally
red as a warning if you press it. The button color of locked destinations varies with the type
of system.

23
Introduction
Overview

Operating a control panel is usually very simple. See Chapter 5, Operating a Stand-Alone Router
on page 83.

The Remote Panel Modules

Like the routers, the remote panel modules are slim (35 mm or 1.38”). Except that they have no
I/O connectors and no video reference connectors, remote panel modules are virtually the same
size and shape as the routers.
Figures 2-30 through 2-33 show front and rear views of the remote panel modules:

Fig. 2-30: Front View of the RP16 Remote Panel Module

Fig. 2-31: Rear View of the RP16 Remote Panel Module

Fig. 2-32: Front View of the RP32 Remote Panel Module

Fig. 2-33: Rear View of the RP32 Remote Panel Module

A remote panel module must have a CR Series control panel attached to be usable. The remote
panel module can be set up for operation under CRSC or NV9000.
Under CRSC, when you execute operations on the attached control panel, the remote panel
module sends commands to the network of routers and receives status messages from the
routers. The attached control panel shows router status on its buttons.
Under NV9000, when you execute operations on the attached control panel, the remote panel
module sends commands to the NV9000 and receives status messages from the NV9000 which
communicates with the routers. The attached control panel shows router status on its buttons.
A stand-alone network allows up to 16 remote panel modules, up to 4 routers, and up to 4
levels.
A CRSC network allows up to 16 remote panel modules, up to 4 routers, up to 8 levels, and
enhanced capabilities.

24
 CR Series
User’s Guide

An NV9000 network allows an indefinite number of remote panels, routers, and levels. The limi-
tations are the number of IP addresses in your network and of course the throughput of the
network.
A network requires one or more customer-supplied Ethernet switches.

Features
Routers
All CR Series compact routers have the following features and characteristics:
• Two power connections for redundancy. The routers have 2 indicator LEDs, one for each
power supply.
• One Ethernet port, supporting network operation.
• One copper grounding terminal.
• One 16-position rotary switch used for network installations. (This switch is hidden if a con-
trol panel is mounted on the router.)
See Creating a Router Network, on page 52, for information regarding connections in a com-
pact router network. See Network Connection, on page 169, for information regarding con-
nections under an NV9000 router control system.
• Quick and easy control panel mounting.
• Non-volatile memory. Routes are preserved if power is shut off.
• One RS-485 (or RS-422) port, supporting third-party automation systems.
The CR Series analog audio routers have DB25 input and output connectors.
The CR Series machine control routers have RJ-45 port connectors.
The CR6400 routers have DIN 1.0/2.3 I/O connectors. We usually call these “coax” connectors.
All other compact routers have BNC inputs and outputs (75W).
All but the machine control routers have one pair of video reference connectors (BNC, 75W,
loop-through, non-terminating).

1RU Routers
Figures 2-34 through 2-45 show the 1RU router features.
16-position
Mounting Slots (4) Cover Plate over Control Panel Rotary Switch
Connector
Screw Holes (2) for Power Supply
Optional Control Panel LEDs

Fig. 2-34: Front View, 1RU Router

25
Introduction
Features

3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers

The 16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES routers are characterized by a row of 16 inputs (BNC) and a row
of 16 outputs (also BNC). The 16×4 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES routers are similar to the 16×16
routers, but they have 4 outputs instead of 16. Figure 2-35 shows a rear view of the 16×16 router.
Figure 2-36 shows a rear view of the 16×4 router.
Ethernet connector
GND Terminal
RS-422 connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 16 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 14 15 16
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4 14 15 16
E146905

PS2

PS2, power 16 output connectors, BNC, 75W

connector

Fig. 2-35: Rear View, 1RU Router (3Gig, HD, SD, or AES)
RS-422 connector Ethernet connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 16 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 15 16
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4
E14690
5

PS2

PS2, 4 output connectors, BNC, 75W

power connector GND Terminal

Fig. 2-36: Rear View, 16×4 Digital Router (3Gig, HD, SD, or AES)

Inputs and Outputs,

GND
BNC connectors, 75W
Ethernet

RS-422 Video reference

Power connectors (PS1, PS2)

Fig. 2-37: Top View, 1RU 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router
Figures 2-38 and 2-39 shows a rear and top view of the 8×8 routers.
Ethernet connector
GND Terminal
RS-422 connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 8 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E146905

PS2

PS2, power 8 output connectors, BNC, 75W Lexan cover

connector plate

Fig. 2-38: Rear View, 8×8 Digital Router (3Gig, HD, SD, or AES)

26
 CR Series
User’s Guide

8 Inputs and 8 Outputs, BNC connectors, 75W

GND

Ethernet

RS-422 Video reference

Power connectors (PS1, PS2)

Fig. 2-39: Top View, 8×8 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

Analog Video Router

The 1RU analog video router is mechanically similar to other 8×8, 16×16, or 16×4 routers with
BNC connectors except that the input and output BNCs have a different organization.
For the 16×16 analog video router, the inputs and outputs occur in blocks of 8:
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W Inputs 9–16, BNC, 75W
Video reference

VIDEO
REF
9K50
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
LOOP
THRU OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
E146905

Outputs 1–8, BNC, 75W Outputs 9–16, BNC, 75W

Fig. 2-40: Rear View, 16×16 Analog Video Router

For the 16×4 router, the 16 inputs and 4 outputs are arranged as for the digital video routers:
RS-422 connector Ethernet connector
Video reference
PS1,
power connector 16 input connectors, BNC, 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
DC LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 15 16
IN THRU
+12V 1 2 3 4
E14690
5

PS2

PS2, 4 output connectors, BNC, 75W

power connector GND Terminal

Fig. 2-41: Rear View, 16×4 Analog Video Router

For the 8×8 analog video router, the inputs and outputs also occur in blocks of 8:
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W
Video reference Lexan cover plate

VIDEO
REF
9K50
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
LOOP
THRU OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
E146905

Outputs 1–8, BNC, 75W

Fig. 2-42: Rear View, 8×8 Analog Video Router

27
Introduction
Features

Analog Audio Router

The 1RU analog audio router is slightly deeper (57 mm) than any of the other 16×16 routers. Its
inputs and outputs use DB25 connectors:
Fan
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32

E146905

VIDEO INPUTS INPUTS

REF 1-8 9-16 17-24 25-32
LOOP
THRU

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16 Outputs 17–24 Outputs 25–32

Fig. 2-43: Rear View, 16×16 Analog Audio Router

The 16×4 analog audio router has 4 output (pairs):
Fan
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32

E146905

VIDEO INPUTS INPUTS

REF 1-8 9-16 17-24 25-32
LOOP
THRU

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8

Fig. 2-44: Rear View, 16×4 Analog Audio Router

Power I/O 1–8 I/O 25–32

connectors GND Fan
(PS1, PS2)
Video reference
Ethernet
RS-422

Fig. 2-45: Top View, 1RU Analog Audio Router

The 4 input connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and 25–32, respectively, and are
labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs are treated as 16 stereo pairs.
The same is true for the outputs.
The 8×8 analog audio router has 8 input (pairs) and 8 output (pairs).
Fan Lexan Cover Plate
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16

E146905

VIDEO INPUTS INPUTS

REF 1-8 9-16
LOOP
THRU

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16

Fig. 2-46: Rear View, 8×8 Analog Audio Router

28
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Analog inputs are at the top; analog outputs are at the bottom (in the dark regions). Each DB25
connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs) which are 4 input (or output) pairs:
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

The analog audio routers also have a small fan.

Machine Control Router

The 1RU machine control router has 16 RJ-45 ports.
Ethernet connector
GND Terminal
RS-422 connector

PS1,
power connector

PS1 CTRL
9K50
ETHERNET
DC
IN
+12V
E146905 1 2 3 4 511 12 13 14 15 16

PS2

PS2, power 16 Bidirectional Ports

connector

Fig. 2-47: Rear View, 16-Port Machine Control Router

Power
Connectors
(PS1, PS2) Bidirectional Ports
GND
RS-422 Ethernet

Fig. 2-48: Top View, 16-Port Machine Control Router

All ports are serial, RS-422, operating at up to 1 MB/s. The interface is RJ-45. Each port has the
following pinout:
1 Gnd Controlling Controlled
2 n.c. Port Port
1
3 Tx + Rx +
4 Rx – Tx –
5 Rx + Tx +
6 Tx – Rx –
8 7 Gnd
8 Gnd

A port can be configured as “controlling” or “controlled” or variants (dynamic, master, slave).

That is, the definition of the port can be reversed (Tx becomes Rx and vice versa) either during
configuration or during operation.
Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for port configuration information.
Refer to Cabling on page 171 for additional information.

29
Introduction
Features

CQX Routers
There are 316×2 CQX router models: 3Gig, HD, and SD. In addition to power, serial, and Ethernet
connectors, these 1RU routers each have a row of 18 inputs (BNC), a row of 8 outputs (also BNC),
and a GPIO connector (DB25):
Bypass 1, 2
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W (BNC, 75W) Inputs 9–16, BNC, 75W

VIDEO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
REF
IN
LOOP BYP 1 BYP 2
THRU
GPI/O CQX AUX
E146905
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Video Reference GPIO Interface CQX Outputs Aux Outputs, BNC, 75W
(BNC, 75W)

Fig. 2-49: Rear View, 1RU CQX Router (3Gig, HD, or SD)
There are 16 normal inputs, 2 emergency bypass inputs, 2 CQX outputs, and 6 aux outputs. The
bypass inputs are switched to the CQX output in the event of a power loss. (The bypass relays
switch when power is removed.)
The GPIO connector supports 16 TTL-level inputs and 4 high-power outputs. All are optically
isolated. See GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers on page 123.

2RU Routers
CR6400 Routers
The CR6400 routers (the CR6464-3Gig and the CR6464-AES) are of modular construction. They
have removable control cards, crosspoint cards, and fan modules. They have 4 I/O card slots into
which I/O cards can be inserted. Presently there are two card types: 3Gig and AES. If a router is
populated with one or more AES card, it is considered a CR6464-AES; if it is populated with one
or more 3Gig (video) cards, it is considered a CR6464-3Gig.
Figures 2-50 and 2-51 show the CR6400 router features.
Power LEDs (2)
16-Pos. Rotary Switch

Fan Module (Removable) Cover Plate over Control Panel Video Reference LED
Connectors
Screw Holes for Control Panel (2) Fan Alarm LED

Fig. 2-50: Front View, CR6400 Router

Visible at the rear of the CR6400 routers are the (removable) crosspoint card, control card, and 4
removable I/O cards. The control card provides an RJ45 Ethernet connector, an RS-485 automa-
tion connector, and loop-through video reference connectors.
Each I/O card has 32 DIN 1.0/2.3 (“coax”) connectors. The 16 at the left are inputs; the 16 at the
right are outputs. Thus the router has a total of 64 inputs at the left and 64 outputs at the right.

30
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Two I/O card types exist presently: an AES card and a 3Gig card. I/O cards must not be mixed in a
router frame.
The router frame has also two power supply connectors and a ground lug. Figure 2-51 shows a
rear view of a CR6400 digital router.
RS-422 Ethernet Video Reference, I/O Cards (4, 3Gig)
Crosspoint Card Control Card (2, BNC 75W)

64 Inputs, DIN 1.0/2.3 (coax) 64 Outputs, DIN 1.0/2.3 (coax) GND Lug
PS1, PS2
Fig. 2-51: Rear View, CR6400 Router (CR6464-3Gig Shown)
 Caution: unless otherwise instructed by a Miranda technician, do not remove the control
card or crosspoint card from the router frame.

Other 2RU Routers

Figures 2-52 through 2-59 show the 2RU router features.
Mounting Slots (6) 16-position
Rotary Switch
Cover Plate over Control Panel
Screw Holes (2) for Optional Connector
Control Panel Power Supply
LEDs

Fig. 2-52: Front View, 2RU Router

31
Introduction
Features

3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers

The 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES routers are characterized by 2 rows of 16 inputs and 2 rows of 16
outputs. The 32×4 routers are similar to the 32×32 routers, but they have only 4 outputs.
Figure 2-53 shows a rear view of a 32×32 digital router.
RS-422 connector Ethernet connector

PS1, PS2, Video reference

power connectors
32 input connectors, BNC, 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
LOOP 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16
DC THRU
IN
+12V
PS2 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16

9K50
E146905
17 18 19 20 29 30 31 32

GND Terminal 32 output connectors, BNC, 75W

Fig. 2-53: Rear View, 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, or AES Router
Figure 2-54 shows a rear view of the 32×4 router.
RS-422 connector Ethernet connector

PS1, PS2, Video reference

power connectors
32 input connectors, BNC, 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
LOOP 1 2 3 4 5 13 14 15 16
DC THRU
IN
+12V
PS2 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21

1 2 3 4

9K50
E146905

GND Terminal 4 output connectors, BNC, 75W

Fig. 2-54: Top View, 32×4 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

Power
Connectors
(PS1, PS2) Inputs and Outputs
64 BNC connectors, 75W
Ethernet

RS-422 Video reference

GND Terminal

Fig. 2-55: Top View, 2RU 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, or Analog Video Router

32
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Analog Video Router

The 2RU analog video router is mechanically similar to other 32×32 routers with BNC connectors
except that the input and output BNCs are grouped in blocks of 16:
Inputs 1–16, BNC, 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC, 75W

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20
LOOP
THRU 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24

OUTPUTS •••• OUTPUTS

9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28
K50
E146905 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32

Outputs 1–16, BNC, 75W Outputs 17–32, BNC, 75W

Fig. 2-56: Rear View, 32×32 Analog Video Router

The 32×4 analog video router has 4 outputs:
Outputs 1–4, BNC, 75W Inputs 1–16, BNC, 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC, 75W

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20
LOOP
THRU OUTPUTS 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24

••••

9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28
K50
E146905 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32

Fig. 2-57: Rear View, 32×4 Analog Video Router

Analog Audio Router

The 2RU analog audio router is slightly deeper (57 mm) than any of the other 32×32 routers. Its
inputs and outputs use DB25 connectors:
I/O 1–8 I/O 9–16 Fan I/O 33–40 I/O 41–48

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48

INPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS

17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

I/O 17–24 I/O 25–32 I/O 49–56 I/O 57–64

Fig. 2-58: Rear View, 32×32 Analog Audio Router

33
Introduction
Features

The 32×4 analog audio router has 4 output (pairs):

I/O1–8 Inputs 9–16 Fan Inputs 33–40 Inputs 41–48

OUTPUTS
1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48

INPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS

17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32 Inputs 49–56 Inputs 57–64

Fig. 2-59: Rear View, 32×4 Analog Audio Router

Power I/O 1–8, I/O 41–48,

connectors I/O 17–24 Fan I/O 57–64
(PS1, PS2)
Video reference
Ethernet
GND
RS-422

Fig. 2-60: Top View, 2RU Analog Audio Router

Analog inputs are in the middle; analog outputs are at the top and bottom (in the dark regions).
Each DB25 connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs):
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

The 8 input connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56, and 57–64,
respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs are treated as 32 stereo
pairs.
The same is true for the outputs.
The 2RU analog audio router also has a small fan.

34
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Machine Control Router

The 2RU machine control router has 32 RJ-45 connectors.
RS-422 connector
PS1, PS2,
power connectors Ethernet connector
Bidirectional Ports 1–16

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1

DC
IN
+12V 1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15 16

PS2
••••

17 18 19 20 21 28 29 30 31 32
9K50
E146905

GND Terminal Bidirectional Ports 17–32

Fig. 2-61: Rear View, 32-Port Machine Control Router

••••

Power
Connectors Bidirectional Ports
(PS1, PS2) Ethernet

RS-422
GND Terminal

Fig. 2-62: Top View, 32-Port Machine Control Router

All ports are serial, RS-422, operating at up to 1 Mb/s. The interface is RJ-45. Each port has the
following pinout:
1 Gnd Controlling Controlled
2 n.c. Port Port
1
3 Tx + Rx +
4 Rx – Tx –
5 Rx + Tx +
6 Tx – Rx –
8 7 Gnd
8 Gnd

A port can be configured as “controlling” or “controlled” or variants (dynamic, master, slave).

That is, the definition of the port can be reversed (Tx becomes Rx and vice versa) either during
configuration or during operation.
Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for port configuration information.
Refer to Cabling on page 171 for configuration information.

Control Panels
The behavior of control panels in stand-alone systems is very different from the behavior of
control panels in CRSC systems. That is because CRSC remote panel operation is configurable
and stand-alone panels are not configurable.
A “captive” panel in a CRSC network is a stand-alone panel and therefore behaves unlike the
remote panels in the CRSC network.

35
Introduction
Features

CP6464
The CP6464 operates only with CR6400 routers.
The 2RU CP6464 can mount directly on the front of the router as shown here:
Dest. Lock Panel Lock

Power
8
7 9
LEDs

A
456

BC DE
23
F0 1

Level
(1–4)

Unused (4)
Selection Buttons (64) Fan LED Dest. Mode
Ref. LED Source Mode
The control panel has an array of 64 selection buttons at the left and 12 function buttons at the
right. Function buttons include:
Panel lock Destination Lock Level 1–Level 4
Source Mode Destination Mode
Four of the function buttons are unused (i.e., reserved for future use).
Refer to the CR6400 Family Users Guide for panel operating instructions.

The CP6464 on a Stand-Alone Router

Mounted on a single stand-alone CR6400 router, the CP6464 has the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is fixed and the mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is fixed:
For AES routers:
SRC button N corresponds to stereo input N.
DST button N corresponds to stereo output N.
For 3Gig routers:
SRC button N corresponds to input N.
DST button N corresponds to output N.
• Selection buttons are illuminated in green (high- or low-tally) in source mode (i.e., when the
source mode button is pressed. Selection buttons are illuminated in amber (high- or low-
tally) in destination mode (i.e., when the destination mode button is pressed..
• Function buttons:
The 4 buttons (immediately below the lock buttons) select levels 1 to 4, level 1 being on the
left. Other function buttons are reserved for future use.

The CP6464 in Stand-Alone Network

In a stand-alone CR6400 network, the CP6464 has the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is fixed and the mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is fixed:
In source mode, selection button N corresponds to source N. Source N comprises inputs N on
all the routers in the CR6400 network.
In destination mode, selection button N corresponds to destination N. Destination N com-
prises outputs N on all the routers in the CR6400 network.

36
 CR Series
User’s Guide

• Selection buttons are illuminated in green (high- or low-tally) in source mode (i.e., when the
source mode button is pressed. Selection buttons are illuminated in amber (high- or low-
tally) in destination mode (i.e., when the destination mode button is pressed..
• Function buttons:
The 4 buttons (immediately below the lock buttons) select levels 1 to 4, level 1 being on the
left. Other function buttons are reserved for future use.

Other Panels
Stand-Alone Router Characteristics
In a single stand-alone router, control panels have the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is fixed and the mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is fixed:
For machine control routers:
SRC button n corresponds to port n.
DST button n corresponds to port n.
For AES routers:
SRC button n corresponds to stereo input n or to mono inputs (2n–1, 2n).
DST button n corresponds to stereo output n or to mono outputs (2n–1, 2n).
For analog audio routers:
The connections (8 for each DB25) are labeled on the router. The 16×16 router has 32
inputs and 32 outputs. The 32×32 router has 64 inputs and 64 outputs. To determine
which stereo pair n corresponds to connection m, use the following formula.
n = (m +1) / 2 [integer division]
If m is odd, it is the left channel. If m is even, it is the right channel.
SRC button n corresponds to stereo input n.
DST button n corresponds to stereo output n.
For all other routers:
SRC button n corresponds to input n.
DST button n corresponds to output n.
• Source buttons are illuminated in green (high- or low-tally) and labeled ‘Source’. Destination
buttons are illuminated in amber (high- or low-tally) and labeled ‘Dest’.
• Function buttons:
The 4 buttons (immediately below the lock buttons) select levels 1 to 4, in that order. Other
function buttons are reserved for future use.

Stand-Alone Network Characteristics

In a stand-alone router network, control panels have the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is fixed and the mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is fixed:
SRC button N corresponds to source N. Source N comprises inputs N on all routers in the
stand-alone network.
DST button N corresponds to destination N. Destination N comprises outputs N on all routers
in the stand-alone network.

37
Introduction
Features

• Source buttons are illuminated in green (high- or low-tally) and labeled ‘Source’. Destination
buttons are illuminated in amber (high- or low-tally) and labeled ‘Dest’.
• Function buttons:
The 4 buttons (immediately below the lock buttons) select levels 1 to 4, in that order. Other
function buttons are reserved for future use.

Characteristics of Panels in CRSC Systems

In a CRSC system, control panels have the following characteristics:
• The meaning of buttons is configurable. The mapping of buttons to I/O connectors is config-
urable. Any button except the two lock buttons can be configured as source, destination,
level selection, or salvo button.
• That a button is green or amber has no particular meaning. The labels ‘Source’ and ‘Dest’
and the numbers identifying the buttons have no particular meaning, although you can use
the numbers to guide your hand to the button you want to press.
Under CRSC, source buttons and level buttons can turn red to indicate breakaway.

Characteristics Common to Both Systems

Control panels have the following common characteristics:
• Each button has a clear plastic cap that can be easily removed to accommodate customer-
defined button legends.
• Panel Lock, Destination Lock buttons (at the top right).
The Panel Lock button is normally low-tally green. It turns bright red when the panel is
locked.
The Destination Lock button is normally low-tally amber. It turns bright red when a selected
destination is locked (unless none of the destination’s levels are selected).
• Two LEDs indicate whether the power supplies of the router or remote panel module on
which the control panel is mounted are connected and functioning.
• A control panel mounts easily and quickly on a router (or remote panel module) enclosure
with two knurled screws and an electrical connector. Connectors for the 1RU panels have 40
pins; connectors for the 2RU panels have 60 pins.
 It is not possible to connect a 1RU panel to a 2RU router or remote panel module, or vice
versa.

38
 CR Series
User’s Guide

1RU Control Panels

The CP1616 control panel can connect to, and control, any of the 16×16 routers. It can also
connect to an RP16 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers.
Figures 2-63 and 2-64 show the 16×16 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons Dest. Lock

Levels 1–4, from left to right

16 Destination Buttons

Fig. 2-63: Front View, CP1616

Connector to Router

Function buttons
Source and Destination Buttons

Power Supply LEDs (2)

Knurled Screws (2)

Fig. 2-64: Top View, CP1616

In CRSC systems, the buttons are all configurable except the lock buttons. In NV9000 systems, all
the buttons are configurable.
The CP1604 or the CP1602 control panel can connect to, and control, a 1RU router and can also
connect to an RP16 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers.
Figures 2-65 and 2-66 show the 16×4 and 16×2 control panel features:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons Dest. Lock

4 Destination Buttons Levels 1–4, from left to right

Fig. 2-65: Front View, CP1604

Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons Dest. Lock

Levels 1–4, from left to right

2 Destination Buttons

Fig. 2-66: Front View, CP1602

39
Introduction
Features

Here too, the illustrations show the fixed meaning of the buttons when the panel is used in a
stand-alone system.
The CP0808 control panel can connect to any 1RU router. It was designed for 8×8 routers:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
Dest. Lock
8 Source Buttons ...

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 Destination Buttons ... Levels 1–4, from left to right

Fig. 2-67: Front View, CP0808

The CP3201 is a 1RU panel that resembles the CP1616 except that most of its buttons are green.
In a stand-alone network or NV9000 network, the CP3201 has 32 source buttons and no destina-
tion buttons. In a CRSC network, the buttons are configurable. The CP3201 is not supported in
stand-alone mode.
The CP1602-CQX is different. See CQX Control Panel, following.

CQX Control Panel

The CP1602-CQX control panel is also a 1RU panel. It can connect to, and control, any of the CQX
routers. It can also connect to an RP16 remote panel module and control any of the CQX routers.
 Although it can connect to any 1RU compact router, the CP1602-CQX can control only a CQX
router. When placed on a remote panel module, it can control only one CQX router. It must
not be deployed in a network of other routers.
 When the CP1602-CQX is placed on a remote panel module, its transition buttons have no
effect on the CQX router.
Figure 2-68 shows the CP1602-CQX features:
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons
Dest. Lock

2 CQX 6 Aux 4 Transition Type Buttons 3 Transition Rate Buttons Unused Buttons (for future enhancements)
Destinations Destinations . . .

Fig. 2-68: Front View, CP1602-CQX

2RU Control Panel

CP6464
The CP6464 control panel can connect to, and control, any of the CR6400 routers. The CP6464
operates only with CR6400 routers. At present, the CP6464 and the CR6400 routers operate only
in stand-alone mode, either singly or in a small network.

40
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Figures 2-69 and 2-70 show the CP6464 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Panel Lock Button Power
Dest. Lock Button Supply
64 Selection Buttons LEDs

Levels 1–4, from

left to right

Fan Status LED Destination Mode

Reference LED Source Mode
Fig. 2-69: Front View of the CP6464
Connector to Router

Selection Buttons (64) Function Buttons (12)

Knurled Screws (2)

Fig. 2-70: Top View of the CP6464
The 64 selection buttons function as source buttons when the source mode button (‘SRC’) is
pressed and function as destination buttons when the destination mode button (‘DST’) is
pressed

Other 2RU Panels

The CP3232 control panel can connect to, and control, any of the 32×32 compact routers. It can
also connect to an RP32 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers.
Figures 2-71 and 2-72 show the 32×32 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Panel Lock Button Power
Dest. Lock Button Supply
32 Source Buttons LEDs

Levels 1–4,
from left to right

32 Destination Buttons

Fig. 2-71: Front View of the CP3232

41
Introduction
Features

Connector to Router

Function Buttons (12)

Source and Destination Buttons

Power Supply LEDs (2)

Knurled Screws (2)

Fig. 2-72: Top View of the CP3232

In CRSC systems, the buttons are all configurable except the lock buttons.
The CP3204 control panel can connect to, and controls, a 2RU router and can also connect to an
RP32 remote panel module and control a network of mixed compact routers. Figure 2-73 shows
the 32×4 control panel features as used in a stand-alone system:
Knurled Screws (2) Panel Lock Button Power
Dest. Lock Button Supply
32 Source Buttons LEDs

Levels 1–4,
from left to right

4 Destination Buttons

Fig. 2-73: Front View, CP3204

Remote Panel Modules

The remote panel modules have the following features and characteristics:
• Two power connections for redundancy. The remote panel modules have 2 indicator LEDs,
one for each power supply.
• One RS-422 port.
• One Ethernet port, supporting network operation.
• One copper grounding terminal.
• One 16-position rotary switch used for network installations. (This switch is hidden if a con-
trol panel is mounted on the router.)
See Creating a Router Network, on page 52, for information regarding connections in a com-
pact router network. See Network Connection, on page 169, for information regarding con-
nections under an NV9000 router control system.
• A control panel mounts easily and quickly on the remote panel module with two knurled
screws and a 40- or 60-pin connector.
• Non-volatile memory.

42
 CR Series
User’s Guide

1RU Remote Panel Module

The RP16 remote panel module — coupled with a 1RU panel — can be used to control a network
of mixed compact routers. Figures 2-74 through 2-76 show its features:
Mounting Slots (4) 16-position
Cover Plate over Rotary Switch
Screw Holes (2) for Control Panel Connector Power Supply
Optional Control Panel LEDs

Fig. 2-74: Front View, RP16

Serial connector

PS1, Ethernet connector GND Terminal (unused)

power connector

PS1 CTRL 9K50

CONFIG
ETHERNET ON DIP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DC
IN
+12V E146905

PS2

PS2, power
connector

Fig. 2-75: Rear View, RP16

Ethernet
GND
Serial port

Power connectors (PS1, PS2)

Fig. 2-76: Top View, RP16

2RU Remote Panel Module

The RP32 remote panel module — coupled with a 2RU panel — can be used to control a network
of mixed compact routers. Figures 2-77 through 2-79 show its features:
Mounting Slots (6)
16-position
Screw Holes (2) for Optional Rotary Switch
Control Panel Cover Plate over Power Supply
Control Panel Connector LEDs

Fig. 2-77: Front View, RP32

43
Introduction
Features

Serial connector

PS1, PS2, Ethernet connector (unused)

power connectors

CTRL
CONFIG
ON
ETHERNET
DIP

PS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DC
IN
+12V
PS2

9K50
E146905

GND Terminal

Fig. 2-78: Rear View, RP32

Power
Connectors Ethernet
(PS1, PS2)
Serial port
GND Terminal

Fig. 2-79: Top View, RP32

CRSC
CRSC (Compact Router System Configurator) is configuration software that runs on your PC. A
compact router network developed using CRSC offers many benefits:
• Configurable panels with a choice of operating modes.
• Flexible networking.
• Router partitions (levels).
• Configuring the ports of a machine control router.
• Maintenance and monitoring.
CRSC is a Java application, available on the software and documentation CD (SB0033). It takes
less than a minute to install and is easy to use. See the CRSC User’s Guide for details.
CRSC might require that your older routers and remote panel modules be updated with firm-
ware compatible with CRSC. This should present no problem to you other than the few minutes
it takes.
You can use CRSC to initialize your remote panel module(s) for use with a NV9000 network and
to restore those remote panel module(s) to use under CRSC.
You can use CRSC to assign IP addresses to CR6400 routers and to view their crosspoints, but do
not assign a level to any CR6400 router. Doing so places the router in “CRSC” mode and it will
not function properly in stand-alone mode (as it must) until you perform a reset of the router to
its default state.

44
 Installation

Chapter 3 provides a functional description of the products.

Topics
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Creating a Router Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Setting Up Your Configuration PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Package Contents
If you have ordered CR Series products from Miranda, you should inspect the shipping container
for damage. If you find any container damage, unpack and inspect the contents. If the contents
are damaged, notify the carrier immediately.
As you unpack the shipping container, look for the packing slip and compare it against the
contents to verify that you received everything as ordered. If anything is missing (or if you find
equipment damage unrelated to shipping), please contact Miranda.
Depending on your order, the CR Series items that can ship include:
• One or more routers.
• One or more control panels.
• One or more remote panel modules.
• One or more power supplies, with straps that secure the AC power cords to the power sup-
plies.
• User’s guides (this document in particular), CRSC software and firmware, CRConfig software,
and button legend templates in different formats, on a CD.
• A quick-start guide (hard copy).
The package does not contain network cables, video cables, BNC terminators, mounting screws,
or grounding wire. You do not need to take any special precautions regarding ESD.
This document does not address the shipment or installation of any other equipment or soft-
ware that can be used in conjunction with Compact Routers (including any system controllers,
NV96xx control panels, EC9700 GUI, EC9710 GUI, and configuration programs such as UniConfig,
MRC, or NV9000-SE Utilities).

45
Installation
Design Considerations

Design Considerations
By the time you are ready to install your equipment and software, you (or someone in your orga-
nization) will have already made most of the system design decisions. In fact, the design
decisions will have been made before the equipment is ordered. The following is a review of the
concepts.
There are several ways to use compact routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels. Here, the panels and routers are configured
(and optionally monitored) using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A standalone CQX (clean and quiet) router with either a captive (local) CQX control panel or a
remote CQX panel.

Stand-Alone Router
The most basic compact router system is a single stand-alone router with an attached (or
“captive”) control panel. A stand-alone router will work reliably and operation is extremely
simple.
The single router can switch signals of its own type — HD, SD, AES, etc. — and supports one or
more signal types and rates. Operation of the router through an automation system is possible.

Stand-Alone Network
A stand-alone network will include 1–4 routers and optionally one or more control panels. A
stand-alone network supports up to 16 remote panels. Panels are optional only if there is a
control system that can perform takes and locks.
If an automation system is in use, the network might not require any panels at all.
Each router in the network is considered a level. The levels range from 1 to 4. The routers can be
switched either independently or simultaneously for multi-level takes.
 If you have 32×32 routers in your network, you will require a 32×32 control panel to handle
all 32 inputs and outputs.

CRSC Network
A CRSC network will include 1–4 routers and at least one remote panel.
A CRSC network is highly configurable. Control panels are almost completely configurable. Each
router in the network can be partitioned. Up to 8 “levels” (generally corresponding to signal
types) can be switched in a CRSC network.
A CRSC network supports the concept of sources and destination. A source is a specific combi-
nation of input ports on one or more levels. A destination is a specific combination of output
ports on one or more levels.
Because sources and destinations are not tied to specific inputs and outputs, a CRSC network
more effectively utilizes the router ports. You can do more with less.

46
 CR Series
User’s Guide

A CRSC network supports salvos.

A CP3201 can be used in a CRSC network (because sources and destinations are not tied to
specific inputs and outputs).
CRSC supports advanced Ethernet connections (e.g., gateway connections).

CQX Routers
At present, a CQX router must operate by itself with a CQX control panel (or automation). Do not
place a CQX router on a subnet with other routers. You can have more than one subnet dedi-
cated to CQX routers, however.
The CQX panel can be local (mounted on a CQX router) or it can be remote (mounted on a
remote panel module). The remote CQX panel then must be connected to the CQX router by an
Ethernet switch.
As product development continues, we expect the networking capabilities of CQX routers and
panels to expand.

CR6400 Routers
CR6400 routers must operate only with other CR6400 routers. They must not be on the same
subnet as CR Series routers of other types. A CP6464 control panel is used with CR6400 routers
and must be “captively” mounted on one of them if you have a network of CR6400 routers.
Remote panels cannot (yet) be used with CR6400 routers.
CR6400 routers operate only in stand-alone mode, singly or in a network of CR6400 routers.

Router Control Systems

A router control system can switch video and audio (and other signal types) elegantly and in fact
offers a number of other features and services not available in the CR Series routers alone.
An NV9000 system also supports a number of additional hardware and software control panels.
Thus, in a system under NV9000 control, CR Series control panels are optional.
Remote panel modules require a specific setup step to work under NV9000. With that setup they
act as NV9000 panels and are configured using NV9000-SE Utilities. Other NV9000 panels can
also be used to control compact routers.

Rack Mount
CR6400 Routers
The CR6400 routers are designed to mount in a 19” rack. Rack-mounting is not a requirement,
but we assume a 19” rack for the sake of simplicity.
Follow these steps to install a CR6400 router:
1 Set the position of the 16-position rotary switch on the front of the router. (It is not on the
control panel. If the control panel is mounted on the router, you must detach the control
panel from the router to access the rotary switch.)
If you have a single CR6400 router, set the switch to any non-zero position.

47
Installation
Rack Mount

If you have more than one CR6400 router, their rotary switches must be set to positions in
the range 1–4. The switch positions for the routers must all be different.
Use a small slotted screwdriver to turn the rotary switch.
2 If the router is to have a CP6464 control panel, place the panel on the front of the router,
mating the electrical connector on the panel to the electrical connector on the router. The fit
requires only minimal force. Tighten the knurled screws that secure the control panel to the
router. Tabs at the ends of the control panel fit in slots in the face of the router, helping you
align the panel to the router.
You may design, fabricate, and install a control panel’s button legends (clear inserts that fit
under the clear plastic button caps) at any time.
3 Mount, and secure, the router assembly in the rack.
The CR6400 router’s mounting holes on each side are spaced 3” (76mm) vertically and allow
approximately 1/8” (3mm) of play horizontally.
Position the router so that its mounting holes are aligned with the holes in the rack. Use 4
rack-mounting screws to secure the router to the rack.
4 If you are using the router on a network, connect an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) from the network
switch to the Ethernet port of the router.
See Creating a Router Network, on page 52.
5 Optionally, connect your video reference.
SDI signals require a reference to perform switches in accordance with SMPTE RP168.
The router has two video reference BNC connectors. You can connect the reference source to
either one. If you have more than one router, you can “daisy chain” the output of one refer-
ence connector to the input of another. The output of the last connector in the series should
be terminated with a 75W BNC terminator.
6 Optionally connect the ground lug to earth ground. Use copper wire from 14 to 6 AWG.
Grounding decisions are left to you or your facilities manager. Failure to connect the ground
will not affect normal operation, but connecting the ground will protect you and your equip-
ment in a power anomaly such as a lightning strike.
7 Connect one or both power supplies.
The external power supply’s cable connector has 4 pins.
 The enclosing ring of the cable connector is connected to ground. Be very careful not to
short the power pins (+48V) to the ring. It is easy to do.
 Always disconnect the power supply from AC power before conecting the power supply
to the router. Then reconnect AC power to the power supply.
See Trouble-Shooting on page 109 if either of the power LEDs on the front of the router (or
control panel) fails to light.
8 Connect input devices and output devices. The exact connections are, of course, determined
by the requirements of your system.
The AES and 3Gig cards have DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Depending on the devices you are con-
necting to your router, you might need to obtain BNC-to-DIN adapter cables.

48
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Other Routers
Whether stand-alone, used in a network, or used in a router control system, the CR Series routers
and remote panel modules are designed to mount in a 19” rack. This is not a requirement, but
we assume a 19” rack for the sake of simplicity.
Follow these steps to install a CR Series device:
1 Set the position of the 16-position rotary switch on the front of the router or remote panel
module. (It is not on the control panel. If the control panel is mounted on the router, you
must detach the control panel from the router to see the switch.)
If you have a stand-alone router, set the switch to any non-zero position.
If you have a stand-alone router network, refer to Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone
Networks, on page 54 for information on how the rotary switch is used.
If you have a CRSC router network, refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for information on how the
rotary switch is used.
If you are using the router in a control system, refer to Network Connection on page 169 for
information on how the rotary switch is used.
Use a small screwdriver to turn the rotary switch.
 In a network, all devices must have unique IP addresses. An IP address is determined (at
least initially) by the rotary switch at the front of the device. The rotary switches for
routers must (at least initially) be distinct. The rotary switches for remote panel modules
must (at least initially) be distinct. However, a remote panel module may have the same
switch setting as a router. Their address spaces are separate by default.
2 If the router is to have a control panel, place the control panel on the front of the router, mat-
ing the electrical connector on the panel to the electrical connector on the router. The fit
requires only minimal force. Tighten the knurled screws that secure the control panel to the
router.
 A 2RU panel does not work with, or even fit on, a 1RU router and vice versa. Do not try to
connect a control panel to the wrong type of router or remote panel module.
You may install a control panel’s button legends at any time. See Button Legends on
page 72.
3 Mount, and secure, the router assembly in the rack.
For the 1RU routers (or assemblies), the mounting holes are spaced 1.25” (31mm) vertically
and allow approximately 1/8” (3mm) of movement horizontally.
For the 2RU routers (or assemblies), the 3 mounting holes on each side are spaced 1.25”
(31mm) and 1.75” (44mm) (3”, 76mm, overall) vertically and allow approximately 1/8” (3mm)
of play horizontally.
 Because the routers are short and thin, you might not have enough space to reach
behind the router and make connections. In that case, leave this step until last.
4 If you are using the router on a network, connect an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) from the network
switch to the Ethernet port of the router.
See Creating a Router Network, on page 52, for information about Compact Router net-
works.
See Network Connection, on page 169, for information about router control systems.

49
Installation
Rack Mount

5 If you intend to use the router in an automation system, connect the 9-pin serial port to a
serial port of your automation system. Contact Miranda for information about the serial pro-
tocol and automation systems.
6 Optionally, connect your video reference.
AES routers require a video reference to operate in synchronous mode. SDI routers require a
reference to perform switches in accordance with SMPTE RP168.
Each router (except the machine control routers) has two video reference BNC connectors.
You can connect the reference source to either one. If you have more than one router, you
can “daisy chain” the output of one reference connector to the input of another. The output
of the last connector in the series should be terminated with a 75W BNC terminator.
7 Optionally connect the ground lug to ground. Use copper wire from 14 to 6 AWG. Grounding
decisions are left to you or your facilities manager. Failure to connect the ground will not
affect normal operation, but connecting the ground will protect you and your equipment in
a power anomaly such as a lightning strike.
8 Connect one or both power supplies. First connect the 4-pin connector to PS1 or PS2 on the
rear of the router. The connectors are keyed and snap into place. There is only one way they
fit. Do not force them. Then connect the power supply to AC power.

n.c. 3 1 12 VDC 12 VDC 1 3 n.c.

n.c. 4 2 GND GND 2 4 n.c.

Receptacle Plug

The second power connection is for redundancy only (protection against failure) and is not a
requirement for operation.
See Trouble-Shooting on page 109 if the power LED on the front of the router (or control
panel) fails to light.
9 Connect input devices and output devices. No particular order or combination is required.
However, if the router is controlled by an Miranda router control system, the configuration
you create for your system controller will have to match the devices you connect.
Many I/O connections use standard 75W BNC connectors. Use Belden 1694A or equivalent
cable, up to 100m for 3Gig video (80 m for 3Gig CQX routers), up to 150m for HD video or up
to 400m for SD video.
Analog audio connectors are DB25. You can obtain DB25 breakout cables from Miranda or
build your own. (The Miranda part number is WC0053.)
Machine control ports (RJ-45) could take ordinary Ethernet cable. However, it is probable
that you will need to connect devices that have DE9 connectors. A DE9 to RJ-45 cable is
required: This is the RJ-45 to DE9 mapping for RS-422:
RJ-45 DE9
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9

50
 CR Series
User’s Guide

This cable wiring is applicable whether the port is a controlling port or controlled port. See
the CRSC User’s Guide for information about port configuration.

Installing Software
The CRSC software is optional. CRSC is required if you want to have a CRSC network. (You can
also use it to change the IP addresses of routers in a CR6400 network an NV9000 network.)
 CRConfig is obsolete and no longer available.
 We recommend that you install CRSC first before creating a network. That way you will have
a way to view the status of your network as you build it.
 CRSC comes with a compact router firmware file that you should upload to all your routers
and remote panels (if you intend to have a CRSC network.)

Installing CRSC
CRSC, its user’s guide (and this user’s guide) are available through the Miranda website.
Double-click the installer icon to install CRSC:

Click ‘Next’ in this window and other windows to advance through the installation process. Click
‘Back’ to retrace your steps and change the installation. Click ‘Cancel’ at any time to stop the
installation. (The installation takes less than a minute.)

51
Installation
Creating a Router Network

Step 2 asks you to designate a folder in which to install the software:

Click ‘Next’. Step through the remaining screens, clicking next to proceed. When the installation
has completed, the installer displays a completion message:

Click ‘Finish’ to exit from the installer and return to the ‘CR Series’ window of the CD window.
The installer creates a desktop icon and a Start menu entry. The default location for the applica-
tion is:
C:\Program Files\NVision\Compact Router System Configurator\CrConfigura-
[Link]
The Start menu entry is:
Start > Programs > NVision > Compact Router System Configurator
Finally, launch CRSC to verify that it executes. You must create a router network before you can
put CRSC to use. Your configuration PC must be on that network. The next section, Creating a
Router Network, tells you how to set up the network.

Creating a Router Network

There are two main reasons to create a router network:
• To perform multi-level operations (takes and locks).
• To operate individual routers or network of routers remotely (e.g., from a separate room).

52
 CR Series
User’s Guide

CR6400 Networks
A stand-alone CR6400 network comprises the following items:
• From 1 to 4 CR6400 routers.
• A CP6464 panel.
• An Ethernet switch capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to accommodate your
routers.
Figure 3-1 shows a sample network of routers:

Ethernet Switch

Router 1

Router 2

Router 3

Router 4

Fig. 3-1: Network of Routers

The panel can switch signals on the 4 routers simultaneously, resulting in multi-level takes. Each
router is considered a level. The panel operator selects levels using the level buttons on the
panel. Takes occur only on selected levels. (However, uf no levels are selected, the result is as if
all levels are selected.)

Levels and IP Addresses in CR6400 Networks

Each CR6400 router in the network is considered equivalent to a level. Each router requires an IP
address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a router to set its IP address and corre-
sponding level:
Level = switch value (1–4).
address = switch value + 100.
The IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 104 and correspond to the router levels.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.

Stand-Alone Networks for Other CR Series Routers

A router network comprises the following items:
• From 1 to 15 remote panel modules (with attached control panels).
• From 1 to 4 compact routers. You can mix routers of any size and type according to your
requirements. Keep in mind that a 16×16 remote panel module cannot control inputs or
outputs numbered 17 and higher.
• Optionally, one or more PCs (running Windows XP) on which you have installed CRConfig.
• An Ethernet switch (or hub) capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to accommo-
date your routers, remote panel modules, and PCs.

53
Installation
Creating a Router Network

Figure 3-2 shows a sample network of routers with remote panel modules:
Remote Panel 1

Remote Panel 2

PC with CRConfig

Ethernet Switch

Router 1

Router 2

Router 3

Router 4
Fig. 3-2: Network of Routers
It is permissible to have a control panel on any router, if that is what you want. Those routers can
be switched both locally and remotely.

Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Networks

Each router in the network is considered a level. Each router and remote panel module requires
an IP address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a router to set its IP address and
level. Use the rotary switch on the front of a remote panel module to set its IP address.
For routers,
Level = switch value (1–4).
address = switch value + 100.
The IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 104 and correspond to the router levels.
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for remote panel modules range from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.
You must assign an IP address to the PC that runs CRSC, if you intend to use it. See Setting Up
Your Configuration PC on page 60.

CRSC Networks
A CRSC network comprises the following items:
• From 1 to 16 remote panel modules (with attached control panels).
• From 1 to 4 compact routers. You can mix routers of any size and type according to your
requirements. A router can be partitioned. Each partition is a level. There can be up to 8 lev-
els. Panels in a CRSC network are highly configurable and do not have some of the con-
straints that panels in a stand-alone network have.

54
 CR Series
User’s Guide

• Optionally, one or more PCs (running Windows XP or Vista) on which you have installed
CRSC.
• An Ethernet switch (or hub) capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to accommo-
date your routers, remote panel modules, and PCs.
 CR6400 routers cannot (yet) be used in a CRSC network,
You can have multiple CRSC networks. CRSC can detect multiple networks if your configuration
PC has the network connections to do so. CRSC can work with only one at a time and that is
called the “active subnet.”
Figure 3-2 shows a sample network of routers with remote panel modules:
Remote Panel 1

Remote Panel 2

PC with CRSC

Ethernet Switch

Router 1

Router 2

•••

Router 4
Fig. 3-3: Network of Routers
Although captive panels (those mounted on routers) are permissible, these panels do not have
the capabilities of remote panels. Captive panels operate in stand-alone mode, controlling only
the router on which they are mounted, and are extraneous to the CRSC network.

Levels and IP Addresses in CRSC Networks

(Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for complete detail.)
Each router in the network is considered a level. Each router and remote panel module requires
an IP address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a router to set its IP address and
level. Use the rotary switch on the front of a remote panel module to set its IP address.
For routers,
Level = switch value.
address = switch value + 100.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, by default, the subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 115.
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for remote panel modules range from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.

55
Installation
Creating a Router Network

CRSC allows you to change the IP address of any router or remote panel module. CRSC supports
router partitioning. A partition is also called a level. You can have 8 levels in a CRSC network. The
level numbers can be in the range [1–250] and must be unique. In other words, CRSC allows you
to override the defaults obtained from the rotary switch settings.
You must also assign an IP address to the PC that runs CRSC, if you intend to use it. See Setting
Up Your Configuration PC, following.

I/O connections
Depends on your hardware and how you configure the routers and panels. Configuration
depends on your hardware and your I/O connections. In other words, there is a cyclic depen-
dency among the system design issues. At some point during the design process, you must
define your I/O connections in CRSC.

CQX Networks
At present, a CQX router must operate by itself with a CQX control panel (or automation). Do not
place a CQX router on a subnet with other routers. You can have more than one subnet dedi-
cated to CQX routers, however.
Figure 3-4 shows the ways a “clean and quiet” router can be connected:
CQX Router
Config Local CQX Panel
PC
Ethernet
Remote CQX

Fig. 3-4: CQX Network

The CQX panel can be local (mounted on a CQX router) or it can be remote (mounted on a
remote panel module). The remote CQX panel then must be connected to the CQX router by an
Ethernet switch. It is possible to use both a captive panel and a remote panel.
Unlike other compact routers, the CQX routers have two rotary switches. You must set both
switches to an appropriate value.

56
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Mode Rotary Switch

The 16-position ‘Mode’ rotary switch configures the router’s video format. Set the rotary switch
to a position in the range 0–9, A, B, C, or D, according to this table:
Setting Format Setting Format
0 1080i, 59.94 or 60 6 1080p, 59.94 or 60 Switch positions 6 and 7
1080p, 29.97 or 30 correspond to video accord-
7 1080p, 50
1080psf, 29.97 or 30
8 2 × 1080i, 59.94 or 60 ing to SMPTE 425 level A.
1 1080i, 50 9 2 × 1080i, 50 Switch positions 8 and 9
1080p, 25 correspond to video accord-
A 720p, 29.97 or 30
1080psf, 25 ing to SMPTE 425 level B.
B 720p, 25
2 525i, 59.94 C 720p, 23.98 or 24
3 625i, 50 D 1080p, 23.98 or 24,
4 720p, 59.94 or 60 1080psf, 23.98 or 24

5 720p, 50 E reserved
F reserved

The default is 1080i, 59.94 Hz (switch setting 0). Positions E and F are not valid positions.
Where a switch setting supports multiple formats, the format is governed by the video reference
applied to the router and must be compatible with that reference format.
 Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router.

Frame ID Rotary Switch

You must set up the IP addresses for the router (and a remote panel, if you have one). First, use
the rotary switch on the router (and remote panel module) to set an initial IP address:
For a CQX router,
address = switch value + 200.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, address ranges from 201 to 215. However, use only a switch setting in the range 1–4
(addresses 201 to 204).
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The default IP address is [Link].
Here, address ranges from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0 because 0 causes
the router or remote panel module to be reset.
After you perform the setup using the rotary switches, you can use CRSC to change the IP
addresses from the defaults.
 Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

57
Installation
Creating a Router Network

NV9000 Networks
An NV9000 network1 has connectivity that differs from a CRSC network. The chief difference is
the presence of the system controller(s):
Remote Panel 1
P/R Net 1 or 2

•••
•••
NV9000
Remote Panel n
House Net

Ethernet

Router 1

Router 2
Config

•••
PC

•••
Router n

Fig. 3-5: NV9000 Network of Routers

The NV9000 is the center of activity and the remote panel modules do no significant processing
whereas in a CRSC network, the remote panel modules do all the processing and there is no
NV9000.
 CR6400 routers cannot (yet) be used in an NV9000 network,
 CRSC is still a requirement for configuring an NV9000 network. NV9000-SE Utilities is also
required.
The NV9000 network comprises the following items:
• An indefinite number of remote panel modules (with attached control panels).
• An indefinite number of compact routers. You can mix routers of any size and type according
to your requirements. A router can be partitioned. Each partition is a (physical) level. There
can be up to 8 levels. The levels must be configured the same way in NV9000-SE Utilities as
you have configured them in CRSC.
Panels in an NV9000 network are configurable and must be configured in NV9000-SE Utili-
ties. Many of the features and concerns of panel configuration in a CRSC network are not
present in panel configurations in an NV9000 network.
• Optionally, one or more PCs (running Windows XP or Windows 7) on which you have
installed CRSC and NV9000-SE Utilities.
• One or more Ethernet switch (or hub) capable of 100MB/s operation with enough ports to
accommodate your routers, remote panel modules, and PCs.
The NV960 system controller has 2 panel/router network ports by default. The NV915 has
one. The NV920 has 3 general-purpose network ports.

1. An NV9000 network that includes compact routers is one that operates under NV9000 software. The
NV9000 system will have at least one NV960, NV920, or NV915 system controller.

58
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Levels and IP Addresses in NV9000 Networks

(Please refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for complete configuration details.)
Levels and IP addresses are configured for NV9000 networks as they are for CRSC networks.
However, levels must also be configured in NV9000-SE Utilities. The NV9000-SE Utilities configu-
ration must match levels you define in CRSC. If the configurations are not identical, your routers
will probably not switch the correct signals.
Remote panel modules must also be configured in NV9000-SE Utilities.
There are 3 parts to installing an NV9000 network.
• Initial setup of routers, levels, and remote panel modules in CRSC.
• Configuration of routers, levels, and panels in NV9000-SE Utilities.
• Cabling of the control connections and cabling of the I/O.
The initial setup in CRSC turns off the factory defaults in the routers and remote panel modules.
After that initial setup, they are ready to be deployed in your NV9000 network.

In CRSC
At the beginning of the initial setup, each router requires a unique IP address and each remote
panel module requires a unique address. Use the 16-position rotary switch on the front of a
router to set its IP address and level. Use the rotary switch on the front of a remote panel module
to set its IP address.
For routers,
Level = switch value.
address = switch value + 100.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, by default, the subnet addresses for routers range from 101 to 115. Initially, each router in
the network has one level. You can define new levels, up to a total of 8.
For remote panel modules,
address = switch value + 50.
The default IP address is [Link].
Thus, subnet addresses for remote panel modules range from 51 to 65.
The numbers on the rotary switch are in hexadecimal: 0–F. Do not use 0.
CRSC allows you to change the IP address of any router or remote panel module. The NV9000
will almost certainly require it. You will define the IP addresses in CRSC and reference them in
the NV9000 configuration.
Change the IP addresses of your devices in CRSC’s ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ page. Do not
forget to click ‘Apply Updates’.
CRSC supports router partitioning. A partition is also called a level. You can define 8 levels in
CRSC. The level numbers can be in the range [1–250] and must be unique. Your level definitions
will depend on your system design. You can change your level assignments at any time. Do not
forget to click ‘Update Router Levels’.
For remote panels to function properly in an NV9000 network, you must set them up for use as
“dumb panels.” In CRSC’s ‘Setup NV9000 Remote Panels’ page, for each remote panel module,

59
Installation
Setting Up Your Configuration PC

check ‘Enable NV9000 Mode’. We recommend that you check ‘Use DHCP. . .’ also. Do not forget
to click ‘Update Remote Panel’.
The NV9000 normally uses DHCP to assign IP addresses to its panels. If you do not configure
your remote panel modules for DHCP, you would then have to configure your NV9000 system
not to use DHCP and that is not feasible.

In NV9000-SE Utilities
You must create a definition for each router you have in your system. In this guide, we are inter-
ested only in compact routers, but your system certainly may include other routers.
You must create a configuration for each remote panel in your system. Your system may also
include NV96xx panels.
The levels you define for the routers in NV9000-SE Utilities must match the levels defined in
CRSC. You must specify the same number of levels, the same level numbers, and the levels must
be of the same size. NV9000-SE Utilities also allows you to define “level sets.” You must have at
least one level set. A suitable level set might be one that includes all levels.
Once panels and routers are defined in NV9000-SE Utilities, you must enumerate the inputs and
outputs (i.e., map sources to router partitions and input connector numbers and map destina-
tions to router partitions and output connector numbers.) You can do this in the ‘Devices’ page
or using the ‘Add Device’ or ‘Add Multiple Devices’ tools.
Further, you can define system salvos in NV9000-SE Utilities and assign them to panel buttons.
Salvos are a topic outside the scope of this guide. Refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide.
Also refer to the NV9000 Network Example on page 161.
 Note that AES setup in NV9000-SE Utilities is unusual. Exercise care: you must use the odd
channel numbers to represent the I/O pairs at the rear of your compact router(s).
You must also assign an IP address to the configuration PC. Your PC might have to appear on the
NV9000’s house net (or the NV915’s “Config” net) and on the panel/router network. See Setting
Up Your Configuration PC, following.

I/O connections
Your I/O connections depend on your hardware and how you configure the routers and panels.
Configuration depends on your hardware and your I/O connections. In other words, there is a
cyclic dependency among the system design issues. At some point during the design process,
you must define your I/O connections in NV9000-SE Utilities.
Refer to the NV9000 Network Example on page 161.

Setting Up Your Configuration PC

Your configuration PC must be assigned an IP address on the same subnet as one of your
compact router networks. The factory default subnet is [Link]. It is expected that you will
use a subnet appropriate for your system. Follow these steps to configure your PC’s address:

60
 CR Series
User’s Guide

1 Launch ‘Settings>Network Connections’ from you PC’s Start menu. The following window
appears:

2 Double-click ‘Local Area Connection’. Then, choose the ‘General’ tab and click ‘Properties’.

3 Select ‘Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)’. Click ‘Properties’ again:

61
Installation
Setting Up Your Configuration PC

4 Select ‘Use the following IP address’ and enter the IP address for your PC. Use the default
subnet mask.

The IP address must be on the same subnet as (one of ) your compact router network(s). We
recommend that you choose an IP subnet address that is not in the range 100–115 or 50–65.
Those ranges are used as defaults.
5 Click OK to finish.

Multiple Subnets
If you have multiple subnets in your compact router system, you will probably have to add those
subnets to your PC’s network configuration. Doing this is especially important for CQX routers.
Follow these guidelines:
1 Starting from step 4 in the preceding procedure, click the ‘Advanced’ button:

62
 CR Series
User’s Guide

2 Click the ‘Add’ button and enter an IP address for your PC on each of the subnets:

3 After adding IP addresses for your subnets, click OK.

Power-Up
Apply power to each router, each remote panel module, and the Ethernet switch if you have a
network. The network should initialize and stabilize in a few seconds.
If you have CRSC connected, you can perform a quick check to see whether your network is
operating. In CRSC, click ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ at the top left. In the Ethernet settings
page, click ‘Refresh List’. All your routers and remote panel modules should appear in the list of
CR Series devices.
If you have a CRSC network that has already been configured, the network will require a few
more seconds to perform its “discovery” especially if it is a complex network.
If you have a CRSC network and have yet to perform any configuration, follow the steps
described in the CRSC User’s Guide.
If your system fails in any way, refer to Trouble-Shooting, on page 109, or Testing, next.

Testing
Stand-Alone Routers (including CR6400 Routers)
A stand-alone router is one that is not connected to a network and (presumably) has a captive
panel mounted on the front.
The router’s rotary switch must be set to a value in the range [1–4].
 The panel will power up in the locked state. The ‘Panel Lock’ button will be red. Just press the
red button to clear the lock.

63
Installation
Testing

1 Ensure that the router has power. Either or both of the power indicator LEDs should be on.
If that is not the case, then check the power indicator LED of the router’s power supply and
check the connectors of the power supply’s cables. Replace the power supply if it is defec-
tive.
You might want to use the power supply strap to help the line cable secure. See Power Cord
Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies on page 175.
2 Examine the captive panel. Are all the source and destination buttons illuminated? Most will
be illuminated at a low level.
3 Perform one or more takes using the panel. (Press a destination button followed by a source
button.)
You do not need to connect any devices to a router to see whether the router switches. But-
ton status on the control panel reflects the router’s state. However, connected devices will
give you visual and auditory feedback regarding the quality of the switched signals.
4 Perform a panel lock. Press the panel lock button and it should turn red. (When the panel is
locked, other buttons are disabled.)
5 Perform a destination lock. Press a destination then press the ‘Destination Lock’ button. Both
buttons should turn red. Press the ‘Destination Lock’ button again. Both buttons should
revert to amber.
6 Exactly one of the level selection buttons should be bright. (There are 4 buttons, corre-
sponding to the level you selected with the rotary switch.)
If the router and panel pass all of these simple tests, it is likely to be working properly. You can
now proceed with I/O connections and more exhaustive and detailed testing that is dependent
only your installation.
Report any failures to Miranda customer service.

CR6400 Networks
A CR6400 network comprises 1–4 CR6400 routers, one or more captive CP6464 panels, and an
Ethernet switch. If you have an automation system, the panels are not strictly required, but are
helpful for testing.
1 Ensure that each router has a unique rotary switch setting in the range 1–4. The switch posi-
tion determines the router’s level.
2 Connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Verify that the switch is operating and that all
ports are communicating. You should see both green and amber communication lights at
the Ethernet connectors of the routers.
3 Your panel should power up with its panel lock button high-tally red. Press the panel lock
button to turn panel lock off. The panel’s buttons should become illuminated and operable.
4 If you have set the rotary switches of your routers correctly, one or more of the level buttons
should be illuminated. Level button 1 (the left-most level button) corresponds to the router
whose rotary switch was set to 1. Level button 2 corresponds to the router whose rotary
switch was set to 2, and so on.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

64
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Stand-Alone Networks
A stand-alone network comprises 1–4 routers, one or more control panels, and an Ethernet
switch. If you have an automation system, the panels are not strictly required, but are helpful for
testing.
The network can include captive and remote panels. It should include a PC on which you can
run CRSC. (CRSC, although not used with a stand-alone network, can provide a better view of
stand-alone routers and panels and can be used for firmware updates.)
 If you are using devices that were previously used in a CRSC network, you must restore them
to their factory-default states. To do that, turn the rotary switches to position 0 and cycle
power. Then turn the rotary switches to different non-zero positions and proceed to make
network connections.
1 First ensure that all your routers and remote panels have power and are functioning.
2 Ensure that each router has a unique rotary switch setting in the range 1–4. The switch posi-
tion determines the router’s level.
3 Ensure that each remote panel module has a unique rotary switch setting in the range 1–15.
(The letters A–F on the rotary switch represent the values 10–15.)
4 Connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Use CAT5 Ethernet cable or better. Verify that
the switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should see both green and
amber communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the routers and remote panel
modules.
5 If your panels are mounted, they should power up with their panel lock button high-tally red
and all source and destination buttons illuminated (low-tally). Turn panel lock off if you wish
to operate a panel.
6 Level buttons should be high-tally for each level in the network. Each source and each desti-
nation button should be illuminated — and high tally when selected.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

Further Testing
Perform a few multi-level takes and locks. See Chapter 5, Operating a Stand-Alone Router, for
instructions.
Report failures to Miranda customer service.

CRSC Network
A CRSC network comprises one or more routers (up to 8 levels), one or more remote panels, and
an Ethernet switch. If you have an automation or control system, the panels are not strictly
required, but are helpful for testing.
The network should not include captive panels. It must include a PC on which you can run CRSC.
(CRSC is a requirement for creating a CRSC network.)
1 First ensure that all your routers and remote panels have power and are functioning.
2 Connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Use CAT5 Ethernet cable or better. Verify that
the switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should see both green and
amber communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the routers and remote panel
modules.

65
Installation
Testing

3 Follow the steps for initial setup as described in the CRSC User’s Guide. This ensures that all
routers and remote panel modules on your network are properly connected.
To confirm that you have done this, choose the ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ page and exam-
ine the list of devices. All devices in your network should be present in the list with the IP
addresses that you have chosen.
4 In CRSC, choose the ‘Firmware Update’ page and upload current firmware to all routers and
remote panel modules. It takes about 2–3 minutes per device.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

Simple Testing with CRSC

Because CRSC requires at least some configuration of your routers and panels and because
CRSC networks involve a considerable amount of design, it is not possible to present a definite
procedure for testing your network. You may consider the following points to be guidelines.
1 Examine your router levels carefully in the ‘Set Up Router Levels’ page.
Ensure that there are 8 or fewer levels on a subnet and that the partition types and partition
ranges reflect your design goals.
It is easy to forget that adding a router adds a level. If you already have 8 levels and add a
router, CRSC allows it and you now have 9 levels. One level must be deleted. (You cannot
simple delete the level created by the router you just added. You must remove the router
from the network.)
Make sure that the added router’s level number is correct for your design.
2 Ensure that any AES router has video reference if it is required and that the partition type is
chosen appropriately.
You can test the operation of an AES router — or any router — in the ‘View Crosspoint’ page.
3 Ensure that any machine control router partition is set to ‘machine control reverse’. Other
partition types are allowed, but not yet implemented.
4 Panel configuration is fairly easy but can become complex if your system is complex. Be
aware of the differences between panel operating modes.

Further Testing
Perform a few multi-level takes and locks. See the CRSC User’s Guide for more information.
Report failures to Miranda customer service.

CQX Routers
A CQX system is restricted: one CQX router and one captive CQX panel and optionally a remote
CQX panel. If you have an automation system, the panel is not strictly required, but helpful for
testing. Your CQX router and panel may be on a network that includes a PC on which you can
run CRSC.
1 First ensure that your router and panel have power and are functioning.
2 Ensure that the router and remote panel module (if you have one) have non-zero rotary
switch settings for the frame ID.
3 Ensure that the router has the ‘Mode’ rotary switch set for the correct video rate. See Mode
Rotary Switch on page 80 for details.

66
 CR Series
User’s Guide

4 (Optionally) connect your video reference at this time. It takes about 10 seconds for the
router to lock to the reference. You can wait until you have I/Os connected before connect-
ing a video reference. You will not be able to perform any useful tests until the reference and
at least some I/Os are connected.
5 If you have a network, connect and power-up your Ethernet switch. Use CAT5 Ethernet cable
or better. Verify that the switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You
should see both green and amber communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the
router (and remote panel module).
6 Your panel should power up with its panel lock button high-tally red and all source and des-
tination buttons illuminated (low-tally). Turn panel lock off.

Basic Functions
Assuming a CQX panel is connected to the CQX router:
1 Press one or more destination buttons. Do the buttons change state (go high- or low-tally)?
2 Press one or more transition type buttons. Do the buttons change state (go high- or low-
tally)?
(You must have pressed one of the two CQ outputs for the transition type and rate buttons
to be enabled.)
3 Press one or more transition rate buttons. Do the buttons change state (go high- or low-
tally)?
4 Press one of the 2 CQ outputs, then press a source button other than the source that was
already selected. Does a transition occur according to the transition type and rate you have
selected? (You will need a monitor connected to the CQX outputs for this test.)
A clean and quiet transition occurs only if the video input formats match the ‘Mode’ switch
setting and a valid video reference is connected.
5 Choose a different transition rate or type, then repeat step 4. Does a transition occur accord-
ing to the transition type and rate you have selected? (You will need a monitor connected to
the CQX outputs for this test too.)
6 Press one of the 6 auxiliary outputs, then press a source button other than the source that
was already selected. Does a transition occur (without any transition effects)?
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

Bypass Functions
This test does not assume that a CQX panel is connected to the CQX router. It does assume that a
monitor is connected to one or both of the 2 CQX outputs.
1 Ensure that a video source is connected to the ‘Bypass 1’ BNC.
2 Route a video source to the ‘CQX 1’ output.
3 Remove power from the CQX router. The monitor should switch to the source from the
bypass input.
4 Repeat steps 1–3 for CQX 2 and ‘Bypass 2’.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

67
Installation
Testing

GPIO Functions
Each of the 16 GP inputs switch a corresponding video input to CQ output 1. The 4 GP outputs
signal alarms and status. See GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers on page 123 for
details.

Using CRSC for Testing

You can use CRSC to view the CQX crosspoint. CRSC presents a 16×8 crosspoint matrix that you
can use to perform takes directly and to view takes and locks performed at a CQX panel.
You can also use CRSC to perform (destination) lock maintenance.

NV9000 Network
An NV9000 network includes one or more compact routers (up to 8 router partitions, or levels),
one or more remote panels acting as NV9000 panels, and an Ethernet switch for each panel/
router network and possibly an Ethernet switch for the house net or config net to which you
configuration PC is connected. The NV9000 network might include large routers and NV96xx
control panels and other equipment, but that equipment is not the concern of this guide.
The NV9000 network centers around a system controller (i.e., an NV960, NV920, or NV915). The
NV9000 network might also include automation.
The network allows captive panels but does not include them (although they do show the
status of the routers on which they are mounted).
Use these guidelines to test your network:
1 First ensure that all your routers and remote panels have power and are functioning.
2 Verify that the Ethernet switch is operating and that all ports are communicating. You should
see both green and amber communication lights at the Ethernet connectors of the routers
and remote panel modules.
3 Follow the steps for initial setup as described in the CRSC User’s Guide. This ensures that all
routers and remote panel modules on your network are properly connected.
To confirm that you have done this, choose the ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ page in CRSC
and examine the list of devices. All devices in your network should be present in the list with
the IP addresses that you have chosen.
You can perform similar tests in the ‘System’ pane (and pages) of NV9000-SE Utilities.
4 If necessary, choose the ‘Firmware Update’ page in CRSC and upload current firmware to all
routers and remote panel modules. It takes about 2–3 minutes per device.
Report and correct any failures before proceeding.

Simple Testing with CRSC

NV9000 networks that use compact routers require some setup in CRSC. (Other NVISION series
routers require some setup in UniConfig or MRC. It is the same idea.) The principal use of CRSC is
(a) to assign IP addresses to all the routers and remote panel modules and (b) to specify the
router partitions (a.k.a. levels). This use of CRSC in an NV9000 network is no different from the
setup required by a CRSC network. A third function is to change all remote panel modules to
NV9000 mode.

68
 CR Series
User’s Guide

1 Examine your router levels carefully in the ‘Set Up Router Levels’ page.
Ensure that there are 8 or fewer levels and that the partition types and partition ranges
reflect your design goals.
Make sure the level numbers are correct. You will entered much of this level information in
NV9000-SE Utilities. The information in CRSC and NV9000-SE Utilities should match.
2 Ensure that any AES router has video reference if it is required and that the partition type is
chosen appropriately.
3 Test the operation of any router in the ‘View Crosspoint’ page of CRSC.
4 Ensure that any machine control router partition is set to ‘machine control reverse’. Other
partition types are allowed, but not yet implemented.
5 Perform a few multi-level takes and locks. See the CRSC User’s Guide for more information.

Simple Testing under NV9000

1 Use the ‘System’ pages of NV9000-SE Utilities to examine, start, stop, or otherwise manage
your NV9000 network.
You will see the routers and panels of your network and their status in these pages.
Verify that all your compact routers and remote panels are present and that their status is
“good.” You might have to correct IP addresses in CRSC or in NV9000-SE Utilities and possibly
restart your NV9000 software.
2 Press a few panel buttons. Do they work? Chances are that if any button works, they all work
(subject to the correctness of your configuration and the suitability of your network design).
You can correct panel configuration errors at any time. You must re-transmit the configura-
tion to the NV9000 when you do so.
Report failures to Miranda customer service.

69
Installation
Testing

70
 Configuration

Chapter 4 provides configuration instructions for the CR Series products.

Topics
Stand-Alone Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
CRSC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
There are several general ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
 CR6400 routers do not (yet) operate in a CRSC network or an NV9000 network.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel and optionally a remote CQX panel.

Stand-Alone Routers
A stand-alone router has very little to configure. This is what you can control:
• The number of power sources: 1 or 2.
• The physical input and output connections.
• The video reference.

The Number of Power Sources

You can connect one or two external power supplies. The second power supply provides redun-
dancy protection if the first malfunctions.
Follow these steps to connect a power supply:
1 Plug the 4-pin connector on the power supply into the 4-pin connector (PS1 or PS2) on the
router. There is only one way that it will fit. Do not force it.
2 Plug the AC cord into the other end of the power supply “brick” and then plug the AC plug
into an AC power outlet. There is no on/off switch.
Note that this conection order is especially important for CR6400 routers because of the large
DC voltage and current values applied to the router. (The two CR6400 routers have a different
connector from other CR Series routers.)

71
Configuration
Stand-Alone Routers

The Physical Inputs and Output Connections

Connect input devices and output devices to the router according to the requirements of your
system and according to the connector types for the particular router(s) you have.
In a stand-alone router, there are no mappings, configurations, or special organization to
consider. With certain exceptions, your devices connect directly to the connectors of your
router. These are the exceptions:
• Machine control routers have RJ-45 connectors. If your devices have DE9 (or other) connec-
tors, you will have to fabricate or acquire adaptor cables. See Cabling on page 171.
• The CR6400 routers have DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. If your devices have BNC (or other) connec-
tors, you will have to fabricate or acquire adaptor cables.
 Video cable length limits are standard: 400m for SD, 150m for HD, and 100m for 3Gig (80 m
for 3Gig CQX routers), for Belden 1694A (or equivalent) cable. Input equalization is automat-
ically adjusted according to that cable type and cable length. Audio cable limits are about
100 m.
 Miranda offers a breakout cable (WC0053) for DB25 connectors. The breakout cable provides
24 individual wires (plus, minus, and shielding connections for each of the 8 channels on the
DB25 connector).

External Video Reference

All routers except the machine control routers accept bi-level or tri-level video references and
switch according to SMPTE RP168-2002. The machine control routers do not receive video
reference.
Unless you want asynchronous mode with an AES router, use an external video reference. AES
routers require a video reference to operate in synchronous mode.
Connect your video reference input to either video reference connector on the rear of the
router. Use the other video reference connector to feed the reference signal to another device.
Terminate the reference signal (or chain of reference signals) using a 75W terminator.

The Rotary Switch

A single stand-alone router does not use its 16-position rotary switch setting (useful only in a
network) but you should set it to a non-zero position in any case. (When the rotary switch is
zero, the router reverts to its factory-default state at power-up.)
When a control panel is mounted on a router, it conceals the rotary switch. You must remove the
control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
 Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

Button Legends
You can label the control panel buttons. Use a desktop publishing program to create your own
button legends. The legends should be transparent and no larger than 0.40”× 0.40” (10mm
square). A 3/8” (9.5mm) square insert will allow a little clearance. The clear plastic material used
for overhead transparencies is suitable for printing legends.
To apply a label to a button, pull the clear plastic cap from the button, insert the label in the cap,
and replace the cap. The caps come off easily. No tools are required. We recommend that you
not use adhesive.

72
 CR Series
User’s Guide

 Button legend templates (in Word,® Illustrator,® and Freehand ® formats) are available on the
documentation and software disk (SB0033-17) you received with your CR Series product(s).
Simply type (or draw) the legends you want and print the page on transparent film.

Stand-Alone Network
For each router, set up I/O, video reference, and power and ground connections as you would
for stand-alone routers.
Similarly, for each remote panel module, set up power and ground connections. Attach a
matching control panel to each. See Stand-Alone Routers, the previous section, for information.

IP Addresses and Levels

A stand-alone network allows up to 4 routers (levels 1–4) and up to 15 remote panel modules.
Decide what signal types (HD, SD, AES, AV, etc.) you want on which levels and set the rotary
switch position to configure the levels accordingly. For routers, the switch positions must be 1, 2,
3, or 4.
To configure the IP addresses of remote panel modules, set the rotary switch to a non-zero posi-
tion. Each remote panel module is treated identically on the network, so the rotary switch
positions are immaterial as long as they are all distinct.
If you are using CRConfig, the PC(s) on which CRConfig executes must be on the same subnet.
Make sure that each PC’s IP address is [Link], where xxx is not the subnet address of any
router or remote panel module. We suggest any address outside the ranges 101–104 and 51–65.
See Levels and IP Addresses in Stand-Alone Networks, on page 54, for information on rotary
switch settings and subnet addresses.
 You can use CRConfig to perform a quick check to see whether your network is connected
properly. Click ‘Find CR Family Routers’ to scan your network for CR Series routers and
remote panel modules. Everything connected to your network should appear in CRConfig’s
Devices list.

CRSC Network
For each router, set up I/O, video reference, and power and ground connections as you would
for stand-alone routers.
Similarly, for each remote panel module, set up power and ground connections. Attach a
matching control panel to each.

IP Addresses and Levels

A CRSC network allows up to 4 routers, 8 router levels and up to 16 remote panel modules.
Decide what signal types (HD, SD, AES, AV, etc.) you want on which levels.
Rotary switches must be unique for routers initially. Then, use CRSC to assign IP addresses that
do not depend on the rotary switches. Also use CRSC to assign level numbers that do not
depend on the rotary switches.
Rotary switches must be unique for remote panel modules initially. Use CRSC to assign IP
addresses that do not depend on the rotary switches.

73
Configuration
NV9000 Networks

See Levels and IP Addresses in CRSC Networks, on page 55, for information on rotary switch
settings and subnet addresses.
 You can use CRSC to perform a quick check to see whether your network is connected prop-
erly. Choose ‘CR Series Ethernet Settings’ to scan your network for CR Series routers and
remote panel modules. All your devices should appear in the list on that configuration page.
Beyond these rudiments, CRSC network configuration is beyond the scope of this document
and depends largely on your design goals. Read about in the CRSC User’s Guide.

NV9000 Networks
An NV9000 router control system system can include compact routers and remote panel
modules on its networks. The (active) system controller is the focus of the system. It controls
everything according to operations performed at NV96xx panels and CR Series remote panels.
Your remote panel modules must be set up for NV9000 and subsequently configured in
NV9000-SE Utilities. (They can be converted back to CRSC.) It is generally required to use CRSC
to set up the initial IP addresses of the remote panel modules and routers and the levels within
routers.
After the initial setup is done, use NV9000-SE Utilities to configure the routers and remote panel
modules.

Remote Panel Modules

Every remote panel module in an NV9000 network must be configured in CRSC to operate
under NV9000. Use the ‘Setup NV9000 Remote Panel’ page:

Follow these steps:

1 Select the remote panel module (i.e., a frame) in the table in the lower part of the page.
2 Check the ‘Enable NV9000 Mode’ box.
3 Check the ‘Use DHCP. . .’ box if you want the NV9000 to use DHCP to assign an IP address to
the remote panel. We strongly recommend you check this box.
4 The default panel ID (an NV9000 feature) is derived from the lower 16 bits of the remote
panel’s IP address as defined in CRSC. You can change the panel ID. Note that panel IDs
under NV9000 must be unique.

74
 CR Series
User’s Guide

5 Click the ‘Update Remote Panel’ button to commit your changes.

If you want to revert a panel, uncheck the ‘Enable NV9000 Mode’ box and press ‘Update Remote
Panel’
 Regardless of the terminology you might see on the page, this page affects remote panel
modules and not routers and not control panels.

Router Configurations
NV9000-SE Utilities requires you to enumerate your compact routers. From the ‘Routers’ page,
click ‘Add Router’. In NV9000-SE Utilities, a compact router definitions require ‘NV Compact
Router Ethernet’ protocol. (NV9000-SE Utilities sometimes calls this “NVEthernetProtocolCR.”)
After you add the router, you may specify its IP address, physical levels, and other characteristics.
This figure shows an typical router configuration. It is the AES router used in the NV9000
Network Example on page 161:

The IP address and the physical levels you specify here must match the IP address and the levels
you defined in CRSC. (CRSC allows up 8 levels in total on a single subnet.)
Click ‘Save’ to capture your configuration.

Virtual Levels
You must decide what signal types (HD, SD, AES, AV, etc.) you want on which levels.

75
Configuration
NV9000 Networks

An NV9000 network relies on CRSC to define Compact Router partitions (levels) as it relies on
UniConfig or MRC to define the partitions of other NVISION series routers. If your system is to
work properly, you must define virtual levels in NV9000-SE Utilities that match the levels defined
in CRSC.
To do that, you must create at least one level set. It is often sufficient to define a single level set in
NV9000-SE Utilities that includes all levels.
Go to the ‘Level Sets’ page and click ‘Add Level’.
This level set matches the NV9000 Network Example on page 161:

In this example, the level set includes one SD level, and two AES levels. The physical levels were
defined when you defined the routers.
Each virtual level is defined by some physical level. The virtual levels must match, in number and
type, those you have defined in CRSC. Their names in NV9000-SE Utilities may differ. The
example above matches these CRSC levels:

Do not forget to click the ‘Save’ button.

(The rotary switches on compact routers are of concern only during initial setup in CRSC.)

76
 CR Series
User’s Guide

(1) When a compact router’s rotary switch is at position 0, it will reset to its factory default state
at power up. That is useful at times, but once you have set up a router in CRSC, you want to avoid
position 0.
(2) The rotary switch when it is non-zero defines the router’s default level and its IP address.
Once you have defined partitions for the router (and have redefined the router’s IP address), the
position of the rotary switch no longer matters.
NV9000 configuration, therefore, does not involve a compact router’s rotary switch.

I/O Connections
At some point you will have decided to what devices your routers’ I/Os connect. Use the
‘Devices’ or ‘Add Multiple Devices’ in NV9000-SE Utilities to enumerate I/O connections.
Configuring I/Os in NV9000-SE Utilities is outside the scope of this guide. The page shown below
is the result, in the NV9000 Network Example on page 161, of making I/O connections.

77
Configuration
NV9000 Networks

Panel Configurations
NV9000-SE Utilities allows you to configure RP16s and RP32s as panels.
This shows an RP16 configuration that matches the NV9000 Network Example on page 161:

Button Functions
Any button on the panel can have one of these functions.
• Source
A source button represents a source device (which is generally a set of inputs in the NV9000
network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.
During configuration, when you make a button a source button and it is selected, a drop-
down menu of sources appears. The name of the source appears on the button in the con-
figuration page.
• Destination
A destination button represents a destination device (which is generally a set of outputs in
the NV9000 network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact rout-
ers.
During configuration, when you make a button a destination button and it is selected, a
drop-down menu of destinations appears. The name of the destination appears on the but-
ton in the configuration page.
• Salvo
In the context of CR Series remote panels, a salvo is a system salvo (as opposed to a “local”
salvo or any other kind). A system salvo is a sequence of NV9000 commands, such as Take,
Lock, Release, or Pause, that executes when the salvo button is pressed. System salvos are
stored in the system controller. You can define system salvos in NV9000-SE Utilities.
When you make a button a salvo button and it is selected, a drop-down menu of system sal-
vos appears. The name of the salvo appears on the button in the configuration page.
 An NV9000 system salvo is not the same thing as a CRSC salvo.

78
 CR Series
User’s Guide

• Previous Source
A ‘Previous Source’ button is like an “undo” button: when you press it, the connection to the
source previously routed to a destination is restored.
• Undefined.
Some remote panel buttons can be left undefined. Such buttons do nothing and are unlit.
A remote panel under NV9000 is not quite the same as CRSC. The panel has no lock buttons of
any kind.

Special Functions
At the right side of the configuration page, there are two drop-down lists:
• Default destination.
The default destination is a destination to be selected when the panel powers up. That desti-
nation remains selected until an operator selects another destination at the panel.
Because of the default destination, the panel could conceivably function as a single-destina-
tion panel. Without a default destination, at least one destination button is required.
• Status monitor.
The status monitor is a destination device (such as a video monitor) on which the output(s)
of the currently selected destination are replicated. When you select a different destination,
the status monitor output reflects that change. When you select a different source for a des-
tination, the status monitor output reflects that change also.

References
Refer to NV9000 Router Control Systems on page 168 for information about configuring an
NV9000 system.
NV9000-SE Utilities is the configuration software used to configure a system controller. Please
refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities online documentation or to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide.

CQX Routers
At present, a CQX router, like a stand-alone router, has very little to configure:
• The video format.
• The frame ID.
• The number of power sources: 1 or 2.
• The physical input and output connections.
• The video reference.

79
Configuration
CQX Routers

Mode Rotary Switch

The 16-position ‘Mode’ rotary switch configures the router’s video format. Set the rotary switch
to a position in the range 0–9, A, B, C, or D, according to this table:
Setting Format Setting Format
0 1080i, 59.94 or 60 6 1080p, 59.94 or 60 Switch positions 6 and 7
1080p, 29.97 or 30 correspond to video accord-
7 1080p, 50
1080psf, 29.97 or 30
8 2 × 1080i, 59.94 or 60 ing to SMPTE 425 level A.
1 1080i, 50 9 2 × 1080i, 50 Switch positions 8 and 9
1080p, 25 correspond to video accord-
A 720p, 29.97 or 30
1080psf, 25 ing to SMPTE 425 level B.
B 720p, 25
2 525i, 59.94 C 720p, 23.98 or 24
3 625i, 50 D 1080p, 23.98 or 24,
4 720p, 59.94 or 60 1080psf, 23.98 or 24

5 720p, 50 E reserved
F reserved

The default is 1080i, 59.94 Hz (switch setting 0). Positions E and F are not valid positions.
Where a switch setting supports multiple formats, the format is governed by the video reference
applied to the router and must be compatible with that reference format.
 When a control panel is mounted on a router or remote panel module, it conceals the rotary
switch. You must remove the control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
 Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.

Frame ID Rotary Switch

Set the router’s 16-position ‘Frame ID’ rotary switch to a position from 1 to 4. Do not use position
0. (When the rotary switch is zero, the router reverts to its factory-default state at power-up.)
If you have a remote panel, set the remote panel module’s 16-position rotary switch to a non-
zero position. (When the rotary switch is zero, the remote panel module also reverts to its
factory-default state at power-up.)
 When a control panel is mounted on a router or remote panel module, it conceals the rotary
switch. You must remove the control panel when you are setting the rotary switch.
 Every time you make a switch change, power-cycle the router or remote panel module.
The rotary switch determines the IP address of the router or remote panel module. You can
change the IP address(es) in CRSC.

The Number of Power Sources

You can connect one or two external power supplies. The second power supply provides redun-
dancy protection if the first malfunctions.
Follow these steps to connect a power supply:
1 Plug the 4-pin connector on the power supply into the 4-pin connector (PS1 or PS2) on the
router. There is only one way that it will fit. Do not force it.
2 Plug the AC cord into the other end of the power supply “brick” and then plug the AC plug
into an AC power outlet. There is no on/off switch.

80
 CR Series
User’s Guide

The Physical Inputs and Output Connections

Connect input devices and output devices to the router according to the requirements of your
system and according to the connector types for the particular router(s) you have. Keep in mind
that there are 16 normal video inputs, 2 bypass video inputs, 2 CQX outputs, and 6 auxiliary
(normal) video outputs. All inputs and outputs use BNCs.
 Video cable length limits are standard: 400m for SD, 150m for HD, and 100m for 3Gig (80 m
for 3Gig CQX routers), for Belden 1694A (or equivalent) cable. Input equalization is automat-
ically adjusted according to that cable type and cable length.

External Video Reference

The CR1602-SD-CQX accepts composite (NTSC or PAL) reference. The other two CQX routers
accept either composite or tri-level video reference. All switch according to SMPTE RP168-2002.
Connect your video reference input to either video reference connector on the rear of the
router. Terminate the reference signal (or chain of reference signals) using a 75W terminator on
the other reference connector.

Button Legends
The buttons are pre-labeled at the factory, but you can create labels of your own. Use a desktop
publishing program to create your own button legends. The legends should be transparent and
no larger than 0.40”× 0.40” (10mm square). A 3/8” (9.5mm) square insert will allow a little clear-
ance. The clear plastic material used for overhead transparencies is suitable for printing legends.
To apply a label to a button, pull the clear plastic cap from the button, insert the label in the cap,
and replace the cap. The caps come off easily. No tools are required. We recommend that you
not use adhesive.
 Button legend templates (in Word,® Illustrator,® and Freehand ® formats) are available on the
Compact Router documentation and software disk you received with your CR Series
product(s). Simply type (or draw) the legends you want and print the page on transparent
film.

81
Configuration
CQX Routers

82
 Operating a Stand-Alone Router

Chapter 5 provides operating instructions for single stand-alone CR Series routers (and panels).
For information regarding CQX routers, see Chapter 9, Operating CQX Routers.
For information regarding CR6400 routers, see Chapter 10, Operating CR6400 Routers.

Topics
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Stand-Alone Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Reminder
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers, possibly with captive panels, and with or without
automation.
See the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information about operating a CRSC network.

Stand-Alone Router
A “stand-alone” router is one operated independently with an attached or “captive” CR Series
control panel. (It is possible to control the router using an third-party automation system but
this document does not address automation.)

83
Operating a Stand-Alone Router
Operation

Operation
Startup
To power up a router, connect the 4-pin connector the power supply to PS1 or PS2. Then plug
the power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two power supplies for redun-
dancy, connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, the router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its
previous operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and
outputs and which of the outputs are locked.)
 If a router’s rotary switch is set to the 0 position, the router reverts to the factory-default
state, not its previous state.
At power-up, the router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal. The AES
routers start in asynchronous mode, but switch almost instantly to synchronous mode if a video
reference is present.
At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn Panel Lock off
before you can use the panel.
At power-up, a control panel lights one of its level buttons, if the rotary switch of the router
beneath it is set to a value in the range 1–4. If the rotary switch is set otherwise, the control
panel does not light any level button. In any case, all level buttons are inoperable. For a stand-
alone router, level selection is disabled.

Takes
Except for the number of buttons, performing takes is identical on all control panels.1 To
perform a take, first press a DST button and then a SRC button. The take occurs immediately.
When you press the DST button, it becomes bright (becomes high-tally amber. The button for
the source that corresponds to the selected DST also tallies high (green). When you press a SRC
button, the old connection is lost, the old SRC button goes low tally, and the new SRC button
goes high tally.
 Example: you want to route input 4 (VTR2) to output 5 (monitor). The monitor is presently
connected to input 3 (VTR1).
• Press the DST 5 button. It goes high tally. SRC 3, the current source, does also.
Source VTR
1
VTR
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Dest MON

• Press the SRC 4 (VTR2) button. The SRC 3 button goes low tally and the SRC 4 button goes
high.

Source VTR
1
VTR
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Dest MON

Pressing another DST button starts a new route.

1. A CP3201 cannot be used with a stand-alone router.

84
 CR Series
User’s Guide

If a destination is locked, it will be low-tally red. If you press its button, it will go high-tally
red. You cannot perform a take for a destination that is locked. See Locks.

Machine Control Takes

The method for performing a machine control take is the same as for any other compact router:
first press a DST button and then a SRC button. However, for machine control routers, the
intrinsic nature of the take is different and the effects on the control panel are different:
1 A machine control router is a point-to-point router whereas other compact routers are X/Y
routers. In an X/Y router, a source can be routed to multiple destinations. In a machine con-
trol router, a new route breaks all previous connections to the source and all previous con-
nections to the destination prior to making the new connection.
2 Port router connections are bidirectional. A port is both an input and an output. Thus, if you
take SRC1 to DST6, SRC6 is also connected to DST1.
For dynamic ports, there is a difference between taking DST 6/SRC 1 and taking DST 1/SRC 6.
DST 1/SRC 6 Port 1 is “controlling.” Port 6 is “controlled.”
DST 6/SRC 1 Port 6 is “controlling.” Port 1 is “controlled.”
Thus, it is the destination that is “controlling.” That is because compact machine control rout-
ers are “data reverse”or “machine control reverse.”
3 Internally, the router can change a dynamic port from controlled to controlling or vice versa.
See Machine Control Routers (page 19) for a description of port types.
 Machine control takes do not start, stop, rewind, or cue any machines, nor do they pre-roll or
position any media.

Locks
The 1RU panel has 6 function buttons. The 2RU panel has 12 function buttons. In all cases, two
of the function buttons are locks, four are level buttons. Any other buttons are reserved for
future use.
Destination Lock Panel Lock
DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

 Buttons are not labeled at the factory. You must create your own labels. See Button Legends
on page 72.

Panel Lock
Pressing ‘Panel Lock’ disables the control panel. Only the ‘Panel Lock’ button remains enabled.
Pressing it again re-enables the control panel.
Panel Lock
DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

85
Operating a Stand-Alone Router
Operation

When the control panel is locked, the lock button is bright red and the state of the entire control
panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The panel lock button is low
tally green when the control panel is not locked.

Destination Lock
Destination lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. To
lock a destination, press the destination button, then press Destination Lock. This sample shows
DST 5 locked to SRC 3:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Locked Destination
The Destination Lock button immediately goes high tally red and the current source and desti-
nation are high tally, with the destination button red. Changes to that destination are disabled.
If you subsequently press a destination button that is locked, the button goes high tally (red), its
source goes high tally (green) and the Destination Lock button goes high tally, as this sample
shows.
Changes to other destinations are, however, enabled, and specifically, you can route the source
that feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.
After you select another (unlocked) destination, the locked destination goes low tally red. This
illustration shows DST 1 selected and DST 5 locked. Because DST 1 is not locked, the Destination
Lock button is low tally amber.
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Selected Destination Locked Destination

To unlock a destination, press the destination button and then press Destination Lock (again).
The destination button reverts to amber and the Destination Lock button goes low tally. This
illustration shows DST 5 selected and no longer locked:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

86
 Operating a Stand-Alone Network

Chapter 6 provides operating instructions for a stand-alone network of CR Series routers (and
panels).
For information regarding CQX routers, see Chapter 9, Operating CQX Routers.
For information regarding CR6400 routers, see Chapter 10, Operating CR6400 Routers.

Topics
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Stand-Alone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Reminder
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers, possibly with captive panels, and with or without
automation.
See the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information about operating a CRSC network.

Stand-Alone Network
A stand-alone network includes 1–4 routers, possibly some remote panel modules (up to 15),
and an Ethernet switch. A remote panel module, to be useful, must have a control panel1
attached. (Automation is possible, but this document does not address automation.)
A PC running configuration software can optionally be connected to the network.

1. A CP3201 cannot be used in a stand-alone network.

87
Operating a Stand-Alone Network
Operation

Operation
Startup
To power up a router or a remote panel module, connect the 4-pin connector the power supply
to PS1 or PS2. Then plug the power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two
power supplies for redundancy, connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, a router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its previous
operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and outputs and
which of the outputs are locked.)
At power-up, a router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal. The AES
routers switch to synchronous mode if a video reference is present.
At power-up, routers and remote panel modules “discover” the presence and state of the routers
in the network.
 It might be convenient to connect all your CR Series power supplies to a power bus that you
can switch on and off. A fully populated network requires 20 power supplies (or up to 40 if
you are providing redundant power). Under normal operation, a fully populated network
draws less than 3 A at 120 VAC.
At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn Panel Lock off
before you can use the panel. This is true whether the control panel is mounted on a router or a
remote panel module.
At power-up, a control panel mounted on a remote panel module lights a subset of its level
buttons, depending on the levels selected at each of the routers in the network. There are 4 situ-
ations to consider:
1 If there is one router (level in the range 1–4), one level button is illuminated but is inoperable
because, with one level, level selection is not possible.
2 If there is no router whose level is in the range 1–4, no level button is illuminated and all are
inoperable. The network routers are configured in error and inaccessible.
3 There are from 1 to 4 routers whose levels are distinct and in the range 1–4. The level but-
tons that correspond to the levels of the routers are illuminated and operable.
4 There are from 1 to 4 routers whose levels are not distinct in the range 1–4. The level buttons
that correspond to the levels of the routers are illuminated and operable. However, the
router network will misbehave in unpredictable ways.

Level Selection
A video or audio device typically receives or transmits signals of several types. A VTR might
handle HD, SD, AES, and machine control signals that need to be switched simultaneously. The
different signal types are considered “levels” in a router network.
In a compact router network, multiple levels can be taken to a destination simultaneously (in a
single button press).
In a compact router network, multiple levels of a destination can be locked simultaneously
(again, in a single button press).

88
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Example
Two levels, SD and AES, are taken from the VTR to the monitor:
HD Routers
SD SD
AES 1 AES
VTR MON
2

Remote Panel Module

The four level buttons on a control panel correspond to the four router levels, with level 1 on the
left and level 4 on the right.
(Destination Lock) (Panel Lock)

1 2 3 4
Levels
A level button is lit in amber if a router at that level is present in the network. A level button is
high-tally when the level is selected and low-tally when not.

Exceptions
In most cases, the level buttons are toggles: press the level button to select the level, press the
button again to deselect the level. However, there is an exception: when you have selected all
the levels in your network, pressing any level button deselects the other levels and leaves the
one you pressed selected.
Another exception is when you have only one router in your network. Pressing the level selec-
tion button has no effect. The single router is always selected.

Takes
A network of routers is capable of multi-level takes. Multi-level takes are issued at a remote
panel module. Local (single-level) takes can be issued through the crosspoint displayed in
CRConfig.
Follow these steps to perform a multi-level take:
1 Press the level buttons on a remote panel module to select the levels for the take. Be aware
of the level selection exceptions, listed under Exceptions in the previous section. Selected
levels show high-tally amber.
2 Press a destination button on the remote panel module to choose a destination.
3 Press a source button on the remote panel module to route the source to the chosen desti-
nation.
The take is complete. A routing switch occurs on each level you selected at the remote panel
module. If you are monitoring the network with CRConfig, you can view the results of the take in
CRConfig’s crosspoint image.

89
Operating a Stand-Alone Network
Operation

Machine Control Takes

Performing machine control takes is the same in a stand-alone network as for standalone
routers. See Machine Control Takes (page 85).
However, in a network that includes machine control router(s), operators must be aware of the
difference between machine control routers and other routers (video and audio).
Machine control routers are point-to-point and other routers are X/Y. Creating a point-to-point
connection breaks any connections previously made to the source and to the destination. In a
video or audio router, prior connections are not generally broken: you can route a source to
multiple destinations.
In a network that includes machine control routers, you might wish to switch video and audio
levels separately from machine control levels.
 Machine control takes do not start, stop, rewind, or cue machines, nor do they pre-roll or
position any media.

Locks
Performing locks in a network is almost the same as performing locks in a stand-alone system.
However, please note:
• A panel lock performed at a remote panel module locks the remote panel module’s control
panel only.
• A destination lock performed at a remote panel module locks a destination on all selected
levels. The lock state of a destination is not changed on unselected levels.
If all the selected levels of a destination are locked, the destination button is red. If some of
the selected levels of a destination are unlocked, the destination button is amber.
• A destination locked at one control panel (on a router or remote panel module) cannot be
unlocked at another control panel.
 Be sure to unlock any locks before removing a panel from a network!
As previously stated, two of the function buttons are locks and four are level buttons. (Any other
function buttons are reserved for future use.)
Destination Lock Panel Lock
DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

LVL
1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4 Level selection buttons

This illustration shows a system that has 3 levels (1–3), two of which are selected. Buttons for
selected levels are high-tally. The button for (non-existent) level 4 is unlit.
 Buttons are not labeled at the factory. You must create your own labels. See Button Legends
on page 72.

90
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Panel Lock
Pressing Panel Lock disables the control panel on the remote panel module where you press
Panel Lock. Only the Panel Lock button remains enabled. Pressing it again re-enables the control
panel.
Panel Lock
DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

LVL LVL LVL LVL

1 2 3 4

When the control panel is locked, the Panel Lock button is bright red and the state of the entire
control panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The Panel Lock button
is low tally green when the control panel is not locked.
 Remember that a Panel Lock button locks that panel only. It does not lock a router, a remote
panel module, other control panels, or the network.

Destination Lock
Destination Lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. In a
network, sources and destinations comprise one or more levels. When you lock a destination, it
is locked on the levels you select.
To lock a destination, first press level buttons on a remote panel module (or local panel) to select
the intended levels. These illustrations show a system that has 3 levels (1–3), two of which are
selected. Buttons for selected levels are high-tally.
After selecting levels, press a destination button on the remote panel module, then press Desti-
nation Lock. This sample shows SRC 3 locked to DST 5 on levels 2 and 3, but not level 1:
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON LVL

1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4

Locked Destination
The Destination Lock button immediately goes high tally red and the current source and desti-
nation go high tally, with the destination button red. Changes to that destination are disabled
on all selected levels. If you subsequently press a destination button that is locked, the button
goes high tally (red), its source goes high tally (green) and the Destination Lock button goes
high tally, as this sample shows.
Changes to other destinations are, however, enabled, and specifically, you can route the source
that feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.
Changes to unselected levels for that destination remain enabled. In these examples, level 1 is
unselected and therefore, you can route to device 5 on level 1.

91
Operating a Stand-Alone Network
Operation

After you select another (unlocked) destination, the locked destination goes low tally red. This
illustration shows DST 1 selected and DST 5 locked. Because DST 1 is not locked, the Destination
Lock button is low tally amber.
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON LVL

1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4

Selected Destination Locked Destination

To unlock a destination, press the destination button on the remote panel module and then
press Destination Lock (again). The destination button reverts to amber and the Destination
Lock button goes low tally. This illustration shows DST 5 selected and no longer locked:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON LVL

1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4

A destination button on a remote panel module will be red (high-tally if selected, low tally if not)
when all of its levels are locked and selected.
Selecting or deselecting a level does not affect the signals being routed on that level. Nor does
pressing a destination button or either of the lock buttons. It is only when you press a source
button (effecting a take) that the signals are changed.

92
 Operating a CRSC Network

Chapter 7 provides operating instructions for a CRSC network of CR Series routers (and panels).
For information regarding CQX routers, see Chapter 9, Operating CQX Routers.
For information regarding CR6400 routers, see Chapter 10, Operating CR6400 Routers.

Topics
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CRSC Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Reminder
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers, possibly with captive panels, and with or without
automation.

CRSC Networks
Operation of a CRSC network can vary from very simple to very complex. There are many
options and many factors to consider.
Refer to the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information regarding options.

93
Operating a CRSC Network
CRSC Networks

94
 Operating in an NV9000 Network

Chapter 8 provides operating instructions for NV9000 router control systems that use CR Series
routers (and panels).
For information regarding CQX routers, see Chapter 9, Operating CQX Routers.
For information regarding CR6400 routers, see Chapter 10, Operating CR6400 Routers.

Topics
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NV9000 Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Reminder
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers, possibly with captive panels, and with or without
automation.
See the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information about operating a CRSC network.

NV9000 Networks
In an NV9000 router control system, it is the system controller that is the focal point of the
system — the “clearing house” for all commands and responses. Remote panels are compara-
tively simple panels under NV9000. Their function set includes these buttons:
• Source
A source button represents a source device (which provides a set of inputs to the NV9000
network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.
• Destination
A destination button represents a destination device (which comprises a set of outputs in the
NV9000 network. The devices do not necessarily have to be connected to compact routers.

95
Operating in an NV9000 Network
NV9000 Networks

• Salvo
In the context of CR Series remote panels, a salvo is system salvo (as opposed to a “local”
salvo or any other kind). A system salvo is a sequence of NV9000 commands, such as Take,
Lock, Release, or Pause, that executes when the salvo button is pressed. System salvos are
stored in the system controller. System salvos are defined in NV9000-SE Utilities.
 Note that NV9000 system salvos are not the same as CRSC salvos.
• Previous source
A ‘Previous Source’ button is like an “undo” button: when you press it, the connection(s) to
the source(s) previously routed to a destination is restored.
• Undefined.
Some remote panel buttons can be left undefined. These buttons do nothing and are unlit.
A remote panel under NV9000 is not quite the same as under CRSC. The panel has no lock
buttons of any kind. The panel does not have level selection modes. There are two further
considerations:
• Default destination.
The default destination is a destination selected for the panel at power-up. That destination
remains selected until an operator selects another destination at the panel.
• Status monitor.
The status monitor is a destination device (such as a video monitor) on which the output(s)
of the currently selected destination are replicated. When you select a different destination,
the status monitor output reflects that change. When you select a different source for a des-
tination, the status monitor output reflects that change also.

Modes
Because of the possibility of a default destination, a remote panel can function in two ways: as a
m × 1 panel or as m × n panel.
• Takes under an m × 1 (i.e., a single-destination) setup require an operator to press only a
source button.
• Takes under an m × n setup require an operator first to press a destination button, then a
source button.
In either case, the operator may press ‘Previous Source’ following a take to revert to the source
used before the take.

References
Refer to NV9000 Router Control Systems on page 168 for information about using an NV9000
router control system.
Refer to whatever NV9000 documentation you can obtain for information about operating an
NV9000 router system. The NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide provides some background informa-
tion about NV900 router control system concepts, and has functional descriptions of most
Miranda NV96xx control panels.

96
 Operating CQX Routers

Chapter 9 provides operating instructions for CQX routers (and panels).

Topics
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
CQX Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Reminder
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers, possibly with captive panels, and with or without
automation.
See the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information about operating a CRSC network.

CQX Routers
A “clean and quiet” (CQX) router is one that performs smooth transitions in both video and
audio. There are 3 models supporting 3 video formats: 3Gig, HD, and SD.
The “clean and quiet” (CQX) control panel is used with the CQX router. It has 4 dedicated transi-
tion type buttons (cut, v-fade, cut-fade, and fade-cut) and 3 dedicated transition rate buttons
(slow, medium, and fast).
Knurled Screws (2) Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock
16 Source Buttons
Dest. Lock

2 CQX 6 Aux 4 Transition Type Buttons 3 Transition Rate Buttons Unused Buttons (for future enhancements)
Destinations Destinations . . .

97
Operating CQX Routers
Operation

The transition buttons appear in this ordering:

SLO MED FST

Cut V-Fade Cut-Fade Fade-Cut Slow Med Fast

The panel is not configurable at present. (A slow transition is fixed at 3 seconds; medium, at 2
seconds; and fast, at 1 second. A cut transition is instantaneous for video; the audio ramps down
over 3 frames and ramps back up over 3 frames. See CQX Transition Rates on page 159 for more
detail.)
At present, the concept of levels does not apply to the CQX router.
The router can be used with a captive panel (mounted on the router) or a remote panel
(mounted on a remote panel module and connected to the router through an Ethernet switch).
(It is possible to control the router using an third-party automation system but this document
does not address automation.)
The CQX router models each have 2 CQX outputs and 6 auxiliary outputs. The CQX outputs
exhibit smooth transitions. The auxiliary outputs are “normal” outputs.
Bypass 1, 2
Inputs 1–8, BNC, 75W (BNC, 75W) Inputs 9–16, BNC, 75W

VIDEO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
REF
IN
LOOP BYP 1 BYP 2
THRU
GPI/O CQX AUX
E146905
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Video Reference GPIO Interface CQX Outputs Aux Outputs, BNC, 75W
(BNC, 75W)

The CQX router models also have 2 bypass video inputs in addition to the 16 video inputs. The
bypass inputs become active if the router loses power. The bypass relay switches when it loses
power, causing the bypass video sources to be routed to the CQX outputs.
The CQX router models each have a GPIO connector (DB25) that supports 16 TTL-level inputs
and 4 high-power outputs, all optically isolated. Each of the 16 GP inputs switches a corre-
sponding video input to CQ output 1. The GP outputs represent status and alarms.

Operation
Startup
To power up a router, connect the 4-pin connector of the power supply to PS1 or PS2. Then plug
the power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two power supplies for redun-
dancy, connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, the router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its
previous operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and
outputs and which of the outputs are locked.)
 If a router’s rotary switch is set to the 0 position, the router reverts to the factory-default
state, not its previous state.

98
 CR Series
User’s Guide

At power-up, the router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal. It takes
about 10 seconds to lock to the reference rate.
At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn panel lock off before
you can use the panel.
Level selection is disabled because the concept of levels does not apply to CQX routers.

Takes
Takes on a CQX panel involve transition type and rate when the destination selected is one of
the 2 CQX destinations. Takes do not involve transition type and rate when the destination is
one of the 6 auxiliary outputs.
To perform a CQX take, first press a CQX destination button. Then, optionally, choose a transition
type and rate. Then, press a source button. The take occurs nearly immediately (about 5 frame
periods later so that the video processor has time to lock to the new video source).
To perform an auxiliary take, simply press an aux destination button and then a source button.
The take occurs immediately (without a transition effect).
When you press a destination button, it tallies high (amber). The button for the source that
corresponds to the selected destination also tallies high (green). When you press another source
button, the old connection is lost (after the transition), the old source button goes low tally, and
the new source button goes high tally.
Pressing another destination button starts a new route.
 If a destination is locked, it will be low-tally red. If you press its button, it will go high-tally
red. You cannot perform a take for a destination that is locked. See Locks, following.

Locks
The CQX panel has 7 function buttons. Only panel lock and destination lock are active. The other
5 buttons are disabled:
Destination Lock Panel Lock
DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

16

disabled (5)

Panel Lock
Pressing ‘Panel Lock’ disables the control panel. Only the panel lock button remains enabled.
Pressing it again re-enables the control panel.
Panel Lock
DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

16

When the control panel is locked, the lock button is bright red and the state of the entire control
panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The panel lock button is low
tally green when the control panel is not locked.
The ‘Panel Lock’ button also prevents takes controlled by the GP inputs. If this panel is a captive
panel, the lock will also prevent takes from a remote panel.

99
Operating CQX Routers
Operation

Destination Lock
Destination lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. To
lock a destination, press the destination button, then press Destination Lock. This sample shows
DST 5 locked to SRC 3:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Locked Destination
The destination lock button immediately goes high tally red and the current source and destina-
tion are high tally, with the destination button red. Changes to that destination are disabled. If
you subsequently press a destination button that is locked, the button goes high tally (red), its
source goes high tally (green) and the destination lock button goes high tally, as this sample
shows.
Changes to other destinations are, however, enabled, and specifically, you can route the source
that feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.
After you select another (unlocked) destination, the locked destination goes low tally red. This
illustration shows DST 1 selected and DST 5 locked. Because DST 1 is not locked, the Destination
Lock button is low tally amber.
Destination Lock

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

Selected Destination Locked Destination

To unlock a destination, press the destination button and then press Destination Lock (again).
The destination button reverts to amber and the Destination Lock button goes low tally. This
illustration shows DST 5 selected and no longer locked:

Source VTR
1
VTR
2
VTR
3
DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dest MON

100
 Operating CR6400 Routers

Chapter 10 provides operating instructions for a single CR6400 router or a network of CR6400
products.

Topics
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CR6400 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Stand-Alone CR6400 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Stand-Alone CR6400 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Reminder
There are several ways to use the CR Series Compact Routers:
• A single stand-alone router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone routers, possibly with remote panels, possibly with captive panels,
and with or without automation.
• A CRSC network of routers and remote panels with or without automation. Here, the panels
and routers are configured using CRSC.
• A network of routers under an NV9000 router control system.
• A single CQX router with a captive CQX panel (and optional remote CQX panel).
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” control panel or with automation.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers, possibly with captive panels, and with or without
automation.
See the CRSC User’s Guide for detailed information about operating a CRSC network.

CR6400 Terms
There are two ways to use the CR6400 routers and the CP6464:
• A single stand-alone CR6400 router with a “captive” CP6464 control panel.
• A network of stand-alone CR6400 routers with a captive panel (or panels).

Terminology
It is essential for the material that follows to define the terms “source” and “destination.”
In general, the terms source and destination refer to devices (e.g., VTRs, cameras, monitors) that
can be connected to the I/O cards of the router. In discussions of routers, we usually think of
sources and destinations only as the connectors to which a device is connected and we ignore

101
Operating CR6400 Routers
Stand-Alone CR6400 Router

the devices. (In fact, the router functions properly regardless of whether it is actually connected
to any devices.)
A port is a single connector (DIN 1.0/2.3) on a router.
An input port, or just input, is one that receives a signal.
An output port, or just output, is one that sends a signal.

For a Single Router

1 A source is a one input at the rear of the CR Series router.
2 A destination is one output at the rear of the CR Series router.
A CR Series router has a 64×64 switching matrix and thus supports up to 64 inputs and 64
outputs.

For a Router Network

1 A source is set of N inputs on the routers in the network, where N is the number of routers. A
source uses the same input on all N routers.
For example, source 12 comprises input 12 on router 1, input 12 on router 2, input 12 on
router 3, and input 12 on router 4. (All available levels are included in the source.)
2 A destination is set of N outputs on the routers in the network, where N is the number of
routers. A destination uses the same output on all N routers.
For example, destination 55 comprises output 55 on router 1, output 55 on router 2, output
55 on router 3, and output 55 on router 4. (All available levels are included in the destination)
3 If the operator chooses source J and destination K, then input J is taken to output K on all
enabled levels. (A level — i.e., a router — is enabled when a level button selects it.)
Breakaway can occur when you choose different levels for separate takes to the same desti-
nation. (Breakaway is an undefined concept for a single router.)
A CR Series network supports up to 64 sources, each of which can comprise up to 4 inputs, and
supports 64 destinations, each of which can comprise up to 4 outputs.

Stand-Alone CR6400 Router

A “stand-alone” router is one operated independently with an attached CP6464 control panel.
(Automation is possible, but this document does not address automation.)

Startup
To power up a router, connect the 4-pin connector the power supply to PS1 or PS2. Then plug
the power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two power supplies for redun-
dancy, connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, the router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its
previous operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and
outputs and which of the outputs are locked.)
 If a router’s rotary switch is set to the 0 position, the router reverts to the factory-default
state, not its previous state.
At power-up, the router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal.

102
 CR Series
User’s Guide

At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn Panel Lock off
before you can use the panel.
At power-up, a control panel lights one of its level buttons, if the rotary switch of the router on
which it is mounted is set to a value in the range 1–4. If the rotary switch is set otherwise, the
control panel does not light any level button. In any case, all level buttons are inoperable
because, for a single stand-alone CR Series, level selection is disabled.

Takes
There are 4 very simple steps to perform a take (using a CP6464 panel):
1 Press the destination mode button. (The selection buttons turn amber, representing desti-
nations.)
2 Press one of the selection buttons to select a destination. The destination’s button goes
high-tally. It will be red if the destination is locked and the take will not be allowed.)
3 Press the source mode button. (The selection buttons turn green, representing sources.)
4 Press one of the selection buttons to select a source. The source’s button goes high-tally. The
take is complete.

Example
You want to route input 4 (VTR2) to output 5 (MON1). The monitor is presently connected to
input 3 (VTR1).
1 Press the ‘Destination Mode’ button. The selection buttons turn amber. Then press selection
button 5. It is labeled ‘MON1’ in this example. It goes high tally:

MON DST PNL

1 LOCK LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Destination Mode
SRC DST
MODE MODE

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

2 Press the ‘Source Mode’ button. The selection buttons turn green. Then press selection but-
ton 4. The button for input 3 goes low tally and selection button 4 (VTR2) goes high-tally.

VTR VTR DST PNL

1 2 LOCK LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Source Mode
SRC DST
MODE MODE

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

3 The take is complete.

The panel remains in source mode until you again press ‘Destination Mode’. If you forget to
which destination you made the route, the destination will be high-tally when you press
‘Destination Mode’.

103
Operating CR6400 Routers
Stand-Alone CR6400 Router

 If a destination is locked, it will be low-tally red. If you press its button, it will go high-tally
red. The panel remains in destination mode. You cannot perform a take for a destination that
is locked. See Locks.

Locks
The CP6464 has 12 function buttons. Two of the function buttons are locks:
Destination Lock Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

SRC DST
MODE MODE

Panel Lock
Pressing ‘Panel Lock’ disables the control panel. Only the Panel Lock button remains enabled.
Pressing it again re-enables the control panel.

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

SRC DST
MODE MODE

When the control panel is locked, the lock button is bright red and the state of the entire control
panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The panel lock button is low
tally green when the control panel is not locked.

Destination Lock
Destination lock prevents selecting another source for the currently selected destination. To
lock a destination,
1 Press the ‘Destination Mode’ button.
2 press the desired selection button.
3 Press ‘Destination Lock’.
This sample shows destination 5 locked:

MON DST PNL

1 LOCK LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2. Destination 3. Destination Lock

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1. Destination Mode
SRC DST
MODE MODE

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

(Press ‘Source Mode’ to see the source that feeds the destination. The button for that source is
high-tally.)

104
 CR Series
User’s Guide

If you subsequently press a button for a destination that is locked, the button goes high tally
(red), and the Destination Lock button goes high tally, as this example shows.
Other destinations remain unchanged, whether locked or unlocked, and specifically, you can
route the source that feeds a locked destination to any number of other destinations.
When you select another (unlocked) destination, a locked destination goes low-tally red. This
illustration shows destination 1 selected and destination 5 locked. Because the selected destina-
tion is not locked, the ‘Destination Lock’ button is not red, but low-tally amber.
Locked
Destination DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Selected
SRC DST
Destination MODE MODE

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

To unlock a destination, press the selection button for the destination and then press Destina-
tion Lock (again). The selection button for the destination reverts to amber and the ‘Destination
Lock’ button goes low-tally amber.

Stand-Alone CR6400 Network

A stand-alone network includes 1–4 CR Series routers, one CP6464 panel, and an Ethernet
switch.

Startup
To power up a router or a remote panel module, connect the 4-pin connector the power supply
to PS1 or PS2. Then plug the power supply into AC power outlet. If you have chosen to use two
power supplies for redundancy, connect one to PS1 and the other to PS2.
At power-up, a router loads stored program code into its internal FPGA and restores its previous
operational state. (The “state” includes the crosspoint map between inputs and outputs and
which of the outputs are locked.)
At power-up, a router detects the presence or absence of a video reference signal.
At power-up, routers “discover” the presence and state of other routers in the network.
At power-up, a control panel’s ‘Panel Lock’ button is on (red). You must turn ‘Panel Lock’ off
before you can use the panel.
There must be from 1 to 4 routers whose levels are distinct and in the range 1–4. The level
buttons on the panel that correspond to the levels of the routers are illuminated and operable.
If the levels are not distinct, your network will not perform correctly.

Level Selection
A video or audio device typically receives or transmits signals of several types. A VTR might
handle HD, SD, AES, and machine control signals that need to be switched simultaneously. The
different signal types are considered “levels” in a router network.
In a stand-alone CR Series network, multiple levels can be taken to a destination simultaneously
(in a single button press).

105
Operating CR6400 Routers
Stand-Alone CR6400 Network

In a stand-alone CR Series network, multiple levels of a destination can be locked simulta-

neously (again, in a single button press).

Example
Two levels, HD and AES, are taken from the VTR to the monitor:
HD HD
AES AES
Routers
VTR MON
1
Ethernet
2 (Router + Panel)

The four level buttons on a control panel correspond to the four router levels, with level 1 on the
left and level 4 on the right.
(Destination Lock) (Panel Lock)

1 2 3 4
Levels
A level button is illuminated (in amber) if a router at that level is present in the network. The
button is dark if not.
A level button is high-tally when the level is selected and low-tally when not.

Exceptions
In most cases, the level buttons are toggles: press the level button to select the level, press the
button again to deselect the level. However, there is an exception: when you have selected all
the levels in your network, pressing any level button deselects the other levels and leaves the
one you pressed selected.
Another exception is when you have only one router in your network. Pressing the level selec-
tion button has no effect. The single router is always selected.

Takes
A network of routers is capable of multi-level takes.
Follow these steps to perform a multi-level take:
1 Press the level buttons on a panel to select the levels for the take. Be aware of the level selec-
tion exceptions, listed under Exceptions above. The buttons for selected levels are high-tally.
2 Press ‘Destination Mode’.
3 Select a destination.
4 Press ‘Source Mode’.
5 Select a source.
The take is complete. A routing switch occurs on each level you selected at the remote panel
module.

106
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Locks
Performing locks in a network is almost the same as performing locks for a stand-alone CR
Series. However, please note:
• Pressing ‘Panel Lock’ locks that panel and no other.
• A destination lock locks a destination on all selected levels. The lock state of a destination is
not changed on unselected levels.
If all the selected levels of a destination are locked, the destination button is red. If some of
the selected levels of a destination are unlocked, the destination button is amber.
• A destination locked at one control panel cannot be unlocked at another control panel.
 Be sure to unlock any locks before removing a panel from a network!
As previously stated, two of the function buttons are locks and four are level buttons. Two others
are destination mode and source mode.
Destination Lock Panel Lock

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

LVL
1
LVL
2
LVL
3
LVL
4 Level selection buttons

SRC DST
MODE MODE

This illustration shows a system that has 3 levels (1–3), two of which are selected. Buttons for
selected levels are high-tally. The button for (non-existent) level 4 is dark.

Panel Lock
Pressing ‘Panel Lock’ disables the control panel on which you press ‘Panel Lock’. Only the ‘Panel
Lock’ button remains enabled. Pressing it again re-enables the control panel.

DST PNL
LOCK LOCK

SRC DST
MODE MODE

When the control panel is locked, the Panel Lock button is bright red and the state of the entire
control panel is protected. Changes from the control panel are disabled. The ‘Panel Lock’ button
is low tally green when the control panel is not locked.
 Remember that a ‘Panel Lock’ button locks that panel only. It does not lock any router, other
control panels, or the network.

Destination Lock
Destination lock prevents an operator from selecting another source for the currently selected
destination. In a network, sources and destinations comprise one or more levels. When you lock
a destination, it is locked on the levels you select. And when you unlock a destination, it is
unlocked on the levels you select.

107
Operating CR6400 Routers
Stand-Alone CR6400 Network

 To unlock the destination completely, you must select exactly the levels on which it was
locked. But, after you lock a destination on levels, it is difficult to remember on which levels
you have locked it.
To lock a destination,
1 Press level buttons on a panel to select the intended levels.
The following illustrations show a system that has 3 levels (1–3), two of which are selected.
Buttons for selected levels are high-tally.
2 Press ‘Destination Mode’.
3 Press the selection button for the destination you want to lock.
4 Press ‘Destination Lock’.
This sample shows destination 5 locked on levels 2 and 3, but not level 1:

Locked DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Destination LVL LVL LVL Destination Lock
1 2 3

17 18 19 20 21 22 23

SRC DST
MODE MODE

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

When you press ‘Destination Lock’, immediately goes high-tally red and the selection button for
the destination goes high tally red. Changes to that destination are disabled on all selected
levels. If you subsequently press a destination button that is locked, the button goes high tally
(red), and the Destination Lock button goes high tally, as this sample shows.
Changes to other destinations remain enabled and other destinations remain unchanged,
whether locked or unlocked. Note that you can route the source that feeds a locked destination
to any number of other destinations.
When you select another (unlocked) destination, a locked destination goes low-tally red. This
illustration shows destination 1 selected and destination 5 locked. Because the selected destina-
tion is not locked, the ‘Destination Lock’ button is not red, but low-tally amber:
Locked
Destination DST
LOCK
PNL
LOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

LVL LVL LVL

1 2 3

17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Selected
SRC DST
Destination MODE MODE

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

To unlock a destination,
1 Press level buttons on a panel to select the intended levels.
2 Press ‘Destination Mode’.
3 Press the selection button for the destination you want to unlock.
4 Press ‘Destination Lock’.
This will clear the lock on the locked levels you have selected and set the lock on unlocked
levels you have selected.

108
 Maintenance

Chapter 11 provides instructions regarding maintenance.

This document does not address maintenance of NV9000 equipment.

Topics
Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Prevention
There are no user-serviceable parts in the compact routers, control panels, or remote panel
modules. No CR Series product requires any physical maintenance. However, we recommend
that you keep your devices free of dust, water, and contaminants, and ensure that cables are
organized so that they do not short, kink, or break.
Check periodically that your power supplies are working, especially if you are using the second
power connections for redundancy.
Occasionally, Miranda releases new versions of Compact Router software and firmware. If you
order a new router and your existing routers have older software and firmware, the new and the
old products might be incompatible. If you experience difficulties with new routers, contact
Miranda to request software and firmware upgrades.
Update all your network (CR Series) devices to the same firmware revision.
If a router fails, you can perform certain simple diagnostics. Call Miranda if the problem cannot
be solved easily.

Trouble-Shooting
If a CR Series device (router, control panel, or remote panel module) malfunctions, first examine
all input and output connections, all network connections, and all power connections. Verify
that cables are secure at both ends and that they are not broken. Determine that video sources
and destinations are on and functioning properly. Verify that the video reference is functioning.
If everything else in your system is functioning properly, the problem is at the device. Here are
some problems that can occur:
• The LED corresponding to your power supply connection does not illuminate.
• Noisy transitions.
• The router gets power, but does not work properly or fails to “remember” its settings.

109
Maintenance
Trouble-Shooting

Power Supply LED Does Not Illuminate

If the device is otherwise functioning properly, the problem is a faulty LED. (Call Miranda for
service.) If the router is not functioning at all, take the following steps.
Determine whether the external power supply delivers power. (If you cannot do this, call
Miranda.) If it does deliver power, try using the other PS connector. If neither connector works,
the router is “dead.” If one PS connector works and the other doesn’t, the router is defective.
The CRPS1 power supplies from Miranda have an indicator lamp. If the indicator lamp is off,
either the power supply is dead or the AC socket is defective or not connected. Try plugging the
power supply into another socket that you know is working. If the power supply’s indicator light
remains off, the power supply is dead. Otherwise, the AC socket was the problem.

Noisy Transitions
Try using a video reference to align video (and audio) transitions with the sync in the video
reference.
Verify that the video reference signal is appropriate for the router, well-formed, and terminated.
 If you use one of the composite analog signals (525 or 625) as a reference for an HD router,
you will probably introduce switching transients. Because SMPTE specifies the switch point
for HD as NTSC line 4, using an SD reference might cause the switch point to occur at the
wrong place in the HD stream. You might see switching transients. (The SD switch point is
specified as NTSC line 10.) Embedded audio will have a noticeable discontinuity.

CQX Routers
The router will switch at the correct point for HD if its ‘Mode’ switch setting is an HD standard.
See Mode Rotary Switch on page 80 for switch setting details.
For the auxiliary outputs, the video must be aligned to the reference to avoid noisy switches. For
the CQ outputs, the video has only to be within ± 3 lines of the video reference.
 Because of processing delays, a video signal might not line up perfectly with a plant’s timing,
i.e, its reference signal. Aux outputs ignore timing and switches according to the reference.
The 2 CQ outputs, on the other hand, allows a certain amount of delay by accepting the
video within ± 3 lines of the plant reference. The CQX determines how early or late the video
stream is with respect to the video reference, then delays it so that the output video occurs 3
lines after the reference. Doing this allows it to process the video and to perform a clean
switch.
If the video is outside the ± 3-line window, the CQX does not process the video. Instead, it
uses the non-sync bypass (not emergency bypass) to route the video, so that the switch
behaves like an auxiliary output. As with auxiliary outputs, the bypass can result in glitches
in the video and audio, because no processing is being done.

Router Functioning Improperly

If the router gets power, but the router does not transmit signals properly or does not switch
properly, the router has an indeterminate problem. Call Miranda.

110
 CR Series
User’s Guide

 Level selection can be confusing: when all levels are selected, level buttons are not toggles.
Pressing a level button in this situation turns off all other levels and leaves the one you
selected on. This is by design. Do not think this is a malfunction.
 Occasionally, a button press will fail to make contact. Press the button firmly and straight in.
If a button continues to fail, the control panel, router, or remote panel module might be
broken or you might misunderstand something about the way the routers work.
If a router malfunctions, try resetting the router. Either set its rotary switch to 0 and cycle power
or select the router in CRConfig and click ‘Reset Router’.
A control panel powers up in ‘Panel Lock’ state. The ‘Panel Lock’ button at the top right is bright
red. Be sure to press ‘Panel Lock’ once (it turns low-tally green) so that the panel can operate.

Network Failure
Determine whether the Ethernet switch has power. If it has power, check whether the switch is
broken. A quick check is to see whether the switch’s activity lights are on or active.
Check the amber and green lights on the Ethernet port on your router or remote panel module.
These should be on and steady (not blinking).
Check your cables. They might be defective or of the wrong type. If your devices are very far
apart, the cable might be too long.
Again, check power.

CRSC Failures
CRSC failures are not likely to occur. But in rare instances, you may experience difficulties:
1 CRSC doesn’t launch or misbehaves.
If your system crashed at any time, CRSC might have been damaged. Try reinstalling CRSC.
The installation might be defective if CRSC fails immediately after installation.
2 CRSC does not detect some or all of the devices in your network.
It is possible that you configured the IP address of your PC incorrectly. Note that the PC must
not use DNS or DHCP on the compact router network. Refer to Levels and IP Addresses in
CRSC Networks, on page 55, for more information.
Router or remote panel module software or firmware is out of date. Get updates from
Miranda. Remove suspect devices one-by-one to see whether the network stabilizes. Rescan
the network in CRSC each time you do so.
You have duplicated levels or IP addresses. Router behavior in this case is unpredictable.
Unless you have assigned IP addresses to your routers and remote panel modules, remote
panel modules must have distinct rotary switch settings (1–F) and routers must have distinct
rotary switch settings.
It is possible that you have more than 8 routers or more than 16 remote panel modules.
Results are not predictable if you do.
Please report all CRSC failures to Miranda.

111
Maintenance
Trouble-Shooting

112
 Technical Details

Chapter 12 provides electrical, video, audio, and mechanical specifications for the CR Series.

Topics
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Reference Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Video Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

113
Technical Details
Power Specifications

Power Specifications
CR Series Router and Remote Panel Module Power Specifications

Specification Detail
DC power External power supply: 12VDC ± 10%, 5A.
Power consumption 15 W nominal (8×8 3Gig, SWB, SD)
10 W nominal (8×8 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
15 W nominal (16×4 3Gig, SWB, SD)
10 W nominal (16×4 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
20 W nominal (16×16 3Gig, SWB, SD)
15 W nominal (16×16 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
25 W nominal (32×4 3Gig, SWB, SD)
20 W nominal (32×4 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
35 W nominal (32×32 3Gig, SWB, SD)
25 W nominal (32×32 3Gig, SWB, SD, non-reclocked)
5 W nominal (8×8AES)
5 W nominal (16×4 AES)
6 W nominal (16×16 AES)
10 W nominal (32×32 AES)
7 W nominal (8×8 analog video)
7 W nominal (16×4 analog video)
9 W nominal (16×16 analog video)
16 W nominal (32×32 analog video)
15 W nominal (8×8 analog audio)
15 W nominal (16×4 analog audio)
18 W nominal (16×16 analog audio)
40 W nominal (32×32 analog audio)
12 W nominal (16-port machine control)
22 W nominal (32-port machine control)
33 W nominal (16×2 CQX router)
77 W max (CR6464-3Gig router)
55 W max (CR6464-AES router)
Regulatory UL listed and CE compliant.

PS0001 Power Supply Specifications

Specification Detail
AC power 90–264 VAC (127–300VDC), 47–447Hz.
Inrush current < 50A at 230VAC, cold start, at 25°C,
Input current < 2.0A rms at 115VAC; < 1.0A at 230VAC.
DC power < 60W, 12VDC, 5A (5.4A peak), Regulation ± 2%. Ripple < 120mV.
Efficiency Efficiency > 80% at full load typical, 115VAC.
Weight 1.06 lb (0.48 kg).
Regulatory UL listed and CE compliant.

114
 CR Series
User’s Guide

The power supply is a Miranda PS0001-00:

2.39
[60.7]

5.24
[133.0]
Indicator LED

1.62
[41.0]

AC Input DC Output

Fig. 12-1: The power output has Molex 4-pin plug.

See Power Cord Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies on page 175.

CR6400 Power Supply Specifications

Specification Detail
AC power 120–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz, up to 2.0 A.
DC power 48 VDC, 160 W max, 3.34 A max
Ripple and Nois < 240 mV p-p
Efficiency Typically 94%
Weight 1.45 lb (0.66 kg).
Regulatory UL listed and CE compliant.

The power supply is an Miranda part PS0012-00:

35.0
175.0 [2.83]
[1.38]

72.0
[2.83]

Fig. 12-2: Power Supply

Its power output has a 4-pin plug:

2 3
Pins 1 and 4 are +48V;
1 4 Pins 2 and 3 are ground, nominally 0V. The metal ring is ground also.
The power supply’s output is rated at 48 VDC, 160 W max, 3.34 A max.
Its input is rated for 120–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz, and 2.0 A.
See Power Cord Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies on page 175.

115
Technical Details
Reference Specifications

Reference Specifications
CR Series Video Reference Specifications

Detail
Connectors: 2 BNC (1 pair, loop-through), non-terminating, 75W characteristic imped-
ance. All digital routers (HD, SD, AES) accept these video reference rates:

Composite HD Tri-level
525i / 59.94 720p / 23.98 1080i / 47.95 1080p / 23.98
(NTSC) 720p / 24 1080i / 48 1080p / 24
625i / 50 720p / 25 1080i / 50 1080p / 25
(PAL) 720p / 29.97 1080i / 59.94 1080p / 29.97
720p / 30 1080i / 60 1080p / 30
720p / 50 1080p / 50
720p / 59.94 1080p / 59.94
720p / 60 1080p / 60

Input level range: 500 mV p-p to 2 V p-p

Input return loss: > 40 dB, to 6 MHz

Machine control routers do not have video reference connectors.

116
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Compatibility between Video Formats and Reference Rates

Comp Tri-Level Sync

NTSC (525i59.94)

1080p / 23.98

1080p / 29.97

1080p / 59.94
1080i / 47.95

1080i / 59.94
720p / 23.98

720p / 29.97

720p / 59.94
PAL (625i50)

1080p / 24
1080p / 25

1080p / 30
1080p / 50

1080p / 60
1080i / 48
1080i / 50

1080i / 60
720p / 24
720p / 25

720p / 30
720p / 50

720p / 60
Video
Format
525i / 59.94    
625i / 50    
720p / 23.98   
720p / 24   
720p / 25    
720p / 29.97    
720p / 30   
720p / 50      
720p / 59.94      
720p / 60     
1080psf / 23.98 
1080psf / 24 
1080psf / 29.97  
1080psf / 30 
1080i / 50    
1080i / 59.94    
1080i / 60   
1080p / 23.98   
1080p / 24   
1080p / 25    
1080p / 29.97    
1080p / 30   
1080p / 50     
1080p / 59.94      
1080p / 60     

117
Technical Details
Physical Specifications

Physical Specifications
CR Series Router Specifications for all CQX Compact Routers (3Gig, HD, and SD)

Specification Detail
Dimensions Height: 1.72” (43.7 mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75” or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6 mm).
Depth 9.50 ± 0.01” (241.3 mm), enclosure.
10.15” (257.8 mm) overall, including connectors,
10.97” (278.6 mm) overall, with control panel, including connectors.
Weight 1.7 lb (0.77 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75W.
I/O: BNC, 75W. 26 connectors.
GPIO: DB25 (16 inputs, 4 outputs)
40-pin, for optional control panel
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

CR6400 Router Specifications

Specification Detail
Dimensions Height: 3.47” (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50” or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
Depth 10.18 ± 0.01” (258.6 mm), enclosure.
< 10.75” (273.1 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw
Weight 11.8 lb (5.35 kg) with no I/O cards, without control panel.
15.3 lb (6.94 kg) with 4 I/O cards, without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, unusual type. See the drawing under Power Specifi-
cations on page 114.
Ethernet: 1 connector , 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75W.
Two 2×60 connectors for optional control panel.
Removable module 4 I/O card slots at rear
1 crosspoint card slot at rear
1 control card slot at rear
1 fan module removable at the front
I/O module types SDI. AES
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

118
 CR Series
User’s Guide

CR Series Router Specifications for All 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and Analog Video Compact
Routers (Other than the CR6400 Routers)

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72” (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75” or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47” (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50” or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
Depth 0.693± 0.01” (17.6 mm), enclosure.
< 1.29” (31.8 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
< 1.41” (35.8mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
< 2.23” (56.6mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 16×16: 1.7 lb (0.77 kg) without control panel.
16×4: 1.47 lb (0.67 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 32×32: 3.23 lb (1.47 kg) without control panel.
32×4: 2.69 lb (1.22 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75W.
I/O: BNC, 75W. 16×16 routers: 32 connectors, 32×32 routers: 64 connec-
tors, 16×4 routers: 20 connectors, 32×4 routers: 36 connectors.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

CR Series Analog Audio Router Specifications

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72” (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75” or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47” (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50” or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
Depth 1.55± 0.01” (39.4 mm), enclosure.
< 2.16” (54.9 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
< 2.28” (57.9 mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
< 3.10” (78.7 mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 16×16: 1.83 lb (0.830 kg) without control panel.
16×4:1.71 lb (0.774 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 32×32: 3.09 lb (1.402 kg) without control panel.
32×4: 3.00 lb (1.362 kg) without control panel.

119
Technical Details
Physical Specifications

Specification Detail
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-485: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
Video reference: 2 connectors, BNC, 75W.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
I/O Connectors CR1616-AA: 8 DB25s, each having 8 STPs (64 connections).
CR3204-AA: 9 DB25s, each having 8 STPs (72 connections).
CR3232-AA: 16 DB25s, each having 8 STPs (128 connections).
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

CR Series Machine Control Router Physical Specifications

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72” (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75” or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47” (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50” or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
Depth 0.693± 0.01” (17.6 mm), enclosure.
< 1.29” (31.8 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
< 1.41” (35.8mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
< 2.23” (56.6mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 1.31 lb (0.596 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 2.21 lb (1.004 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
Automation: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, RS-485/422, usage determined
by software, SMPTE 207M.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
I/O Connectors CR16-PR: 16 RJ-45, 1 Mb/s.
CR32-PR: 32 RJ-45, 1 Mb/s.
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

120
 CR Series
User’s Guide

CR Series Control Panel Physical Specifications

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.66” (42.2mm),
Width: 17.62” (447.5mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.41” (86.6mm),
Width: 17.62” (447.5mm).
Depth 0.50” (12.7mm) enclosure,
0.82” (20.8mm) overall.
1RU weight 16×16: 0.75 lb (0.34 kg),
16×4: 0.70 lb (0.32 kg),
16×2: 0.69 lb (0.31 kg).
2RU weight 32×32: 1.43 b (0.65 kg).
32×4: 1.31 lb (0.59 kg).
Connectors 1RU: 40-pin, to the Compact Router,
2RU: 60-pin, to the Compact Router.

CR Series Remote Panel Module Physical Specifications

Specification Detail
1RU dimensions Height: 1.72” (43.7mm), fits EIA 1 RU (1.75” or 44.5mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
2RU dimensions Height: 3.47” (88.1mm), fits EIA 2 RU (3.50” or 88.9mm),
Width: 19.0” (482.6mm).
Depth 0.693± 0.01” (17.6 mm), enclosure.
< 1.29” (31.8 mm) from front of rack to extended ground screw,
< 1.41” (35.8mm) overall, to extended ground screw,
< 2.23” (56.6mm) overall, with control panel, to extended ground screw.
1RU weight 1.06 lb (0.48 kg) without control panel.
2RU weight 1.83 lb (0.83 kg) without control panel.
Connectors Power: 2 connectors, Molex 4-pin, keyed.
Ethernet: 1 connector, 10/100BaseT, RJ-45 jack.
RS-422: 1 connector, 9-pin D type, usage determined by software, SMPTE
207M.
1RU: 40-pin, for optional control panel,
2RU: 60-pin, for optional control panel.
Grounding terminal Copper, accepts 14–6 AWG.

Environmental Specifications
CR Series Environmental Specifications

Specification Detail
Operating temperature 0–40°C, ambient.
Relative humidity 0 to 90%, non-condensing.
Cooling No fan required, except for the analog audio routers.

121
Technical Details
Connectors

Connectors
Serial Connector
The automation connector for all CR Series Compact Routers (inlcuding the CR6400 family
routers) has this pinout:

Gnd
TX– 1 Gnd
6
RX+ TX+

Gnd RX–
9
5 Gnd
n.c.

The connector is RS-485, but can be used as RS-422. Most of the compact routers allow RS-485
multi-drop now and eventually all will support it.
Customers who want to operate the router through an automation system may contact Miranda
technical support for information.

DB25 Connectors
Analog Audio Routers
The analog audio routers use DB25 connectors. Each connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs):
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

For 16×16 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and 25–32,
respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs (and outputs) are treated
as 16 stereo pairs.
For 32×32 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40,
41–48, 49–56, and 57–64, respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs
(and outputs) are treated as 32 stereo pairs.
For 32×4 routers, the connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56,
and 57–64, respectively. The inputs and outputs are labelled accordingly. The inputs are treated
as 32 stereo pairs. The single output connector provides outputs 1–8 (4 stereo pairs). The inputs
and outputs are labelled accordingly.

122
 CR Series
User’s Guide

GPIO Connections for CQX Digital Video Routers

The CQX routers use DB25 connectors for GPIO (general-purpose I/O). The connector supports
16 inputs and 4 outputs:
Inputs
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

13 1
–
+
25 14
– + – + – + – +
4 3 2 1
16 15 14
Outputs
Inputs

The 16 inputs are in order on pins 1 through 16. The outputs are paired on pins 17–24. Pin 25 is
ground.

Inputs
Each input circuit has an individual signal connection, but all the inputs share a single ground
connection:
+3.3V +3.3V

3.24K 10K

to internal bus
C
Input n
Optical
Isolation
E
Customer’s
Switch (or MOCD223-M
Equivalent
Logic)

The input turns on (a positive-going pulse) when the signal is connected to ground (on the
connector). The positive-going pulse on input N switches video input N to CQ output 1, where
1 < N < 16.
The router firmware debounces the inputs and requires about 100 ms between the positive
edges of pulses.

Outputs
The output circuit requires an external voltage source:
+2.5V

121
Output n

+ V
Optical
Isolation 30V Customer’s Load
from –
internal bus
PS7221A-2A
Optional Grounding

The Schottky diode across the output limits applications to less than 30 VDC.

123
Technical Details
Connectors

The outputs represent alarm states.

• Output 1 (power supply).
If you have connected two power supplies and one malfunctions or is disconnected, output
1 signals an alarm.
• Output 2 (video reference).
If the router has no video reference or the video reference is disconnected, output 2 signals
an alarm.
• Output 3 (fans).
If any of the fans stop turning, output 3 signals an alarm.
• Output 4 (bypass).
If the router has no power at all, output 4 signals an alarm. (This condition can occur if both
power supplies fail or are disconnected or if main power fails.)
A GP output turns off to signal an alarm condition. When the CQX router is running properly, all 4
GP outputs are on.

124
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Video Specifications
CR Series Digital Video Specifications1

Specification Detail
3Gig Auto re-clocking: 270 Mb/s, and 1.483, 1.485, 2.966, and 2.970 Gb/s, or
auto bypass. Pass-through: 10 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
Input & output impedance: 75W.
> 400 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, 270 MB/s.
> 150 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, near 1.5 GB/s.
> 100 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, near 3.0 GB/s.
> 80 m, Belden 1694A or equivalent, near 3.0 GB/s for CQX routers.
Input return loss: > 15 dB, 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz.
Output level: 800mV pp ± 10%.
Output offset: 0VDC ± 0.5V.
Output rise/fall time: < 135 ps.
Output overshoot: ≤ 10% of amplitude.
Output timing jitter: < 0.2 UI p-p.
Output alignment jitter: < 0.3 UI at 100 kHz
Output return loss: > 10 dB, 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz.
HD-SDI (SWB) Data rates: up to 1.5 Gbps, reclocking at 143, 177, 270, 360 & 540Mb/s
and 1.483 & 1.485Gb/s rates, automatic bypass for other rates.
Input & output impedance: 75W.
Cable equalization: up to 150m Belden 1694A or equivalent cable, at
1.483Gb/s and 1.485Gb/s, and 400m at 143–540Mb/s.
Input return loss: > 15dB, 5MHz to 1.5GHz.
Output level: 800mV pp ± 10%.
Output offset: 0VDC ± 0.5V.
Output rise/fall time: < 270ps (20% to 80%).
Output overshoot: < 10% of amplitude.
Output jitter: < 0.2 UI p-p.
Output return loss: > 15dB, 5MHz to 1.5GHz.
SD-SDI Data rates: auto reclocking at 143, 177, 270, 360 & 540Mb/s and auto-
matic bypass for other rates.
Input & output impedance: 75W.
Cable equalization: up to 300m Belden 1694A or equivalent cable.
Input return loss: ≥ 15dB, 5 to 540MHz.
Output level: 800mV pp ± 10%.
Output offset: 0VDC ± 0.5V.
Output rise/fall time: 0.4 to 1.5 ns.
Output overshoot: ≤ 10% of amplitude.
Output jitter: ≤ 0.2 UI p-p.
Output return loss: ≥ 15dB, 5MHz to 540MHz.

1. All compact SD, HD, and 3Gig video routers support DVB-ASI.

125
Technical Details
Audio Specifications

CR Series Analog Video Specifications

Specification Detail
Signal inputs (NTSC, PAL) Input level: 1V p-p nominal.
Input range: ± 2 V.
Input return loss: < –45 dB, DC to 6 MHz.
Input CMRR: > 60 dB at 120 Hz.
Signal outputs (NTSC, PAL) Output level: 1V p-p nominal.
Output offset: DC offset 0 V ± 30 mV, relative to back porch.
Output return loss: < –45 dB, DC to 6 MHz.
Output-to-output isolation: > 90 dB at subcarrier frequency.
Signal specifications Insertion loss: 0 dB ± 0.1 dB.
Frequency response: 0 dBr ± 0.05 dBr, DC to 6 MHz.
Crosstalk: < –65 dB, at subcarrier frequency.
Noise spectrum: < –60 dB (test signal: luminance ramp.
Differential gain: < 0.1% at subcarrier frequency.
Differential phase: < 0.1° at subcarrier frequency.
Delay scatter: < ±0.65° at subcarrier, any input to any output.
Tilt: < 0.1%.
DC coupled system.
Video reference Input level range: 500 mV p-p to 2 V p-p.
Input return loss: > –40 dB, DC to 6 MHz.

Audio Specifications
CR Series Digital Audio (AES) Specifications

Specification Detail
Signal inputs Signal type: AES3id (2 “mono” channels per input).
Sample rate: 32 kHz – 192 kHz.
Input level: 1V p-p nominal into 75 W.
Input range: 200 mV p-p to 3 V p-p into 75 W.
Input return loss: < –25 dB, from 100 kHz to 6 MHz.
Input connectors: BNC, 75 W.
Signal outputs Signal type: AES3id (2 “mono” channels per input).
Sample rate: async, 32 kHz – 192 kHz; sync, 48 kHz.
Output level: 1V p-p ± 10% into 75 W.
Output offset: 0.0 VDC ± 50 mVDC, AC coupled.
Output rise/fall time: 4 ns – 8 ns.
Output jitter: < 1ns, in synchronous mode.
Output return loss: < –25 dB, from 100 kHz to 6 MHz.
Output-to-output isolation: > 40 dB, from 100 kHz to 6 MHz.
Output connectors: BNC, 75 W.

126
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Compact Router Analog Audio Specifications.

Specification Detail
Signal inputs Input level: Up to 24 dBu.
Input impedance: > 20 kW.
Input CMRR: > 75 dBu.
Input connectors: DB25.
Signal outputs Output level: Up to 24 dBu (unity gain).
Input to output level variations: ± 1 dB, nominal.
Frequency response: < ± 0.05 dB from 20 Hz to 100 kHz.
Output impedance: 50 W, nominal.
THD and noise: < 0.002%.
Crosstalk: > 85 dB, worst case.
SNR: > 100 dB, relative to +24 dBu (20 Hz to 20 kHz).
Output connectors: DB25.

Drawings
The following drawings identify features and provide overall and critical dimensions. The draw-
ings are grouped as follows:
• 1RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules
• CQX Routers and Control Panel
• 2RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules

Please refer to the CR6400 Family User’s Guide for drawings of the CR6400 family routers and
panel.

127
Technical Details
Drawings

1RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules

PS1

PS2

FRAME ID
Power LEDs

16-Pos. Rotary Switch

All the 1RU compact routers have the same features

and dimensions at the front, except for the legends:
Cover Plate over Control

Legend Product Category

16.74 [425.2]
19.0 [482.6]

Panel Connector

CR1616-3Gig Digital Video Router

CR1616-HD Digital Video Router
CR1616-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR1616-SD Digital Video Router
CR1616-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR1616-AES Digital Audio Router
CR1616-AV Analog Video Router
CR1616-AA Analog Audio Router
CR1604-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR1604-HD Digital Video Router
CR1604-HD-NR Digital Video Router
0.375 x 0.25 [9.5 x 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x

CR1604-SD Digital Video Router

CR1604-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR1604-AES Digital Audio Router
CR1604-AV Analog Video Router
‹Product Category›
‹LEGEND›

CR1604-AA Analog Audio Router

CR0808-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR0808-HD Digital Video Router
CR0808-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR0808-SD Digital Video Router
CR0808-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR0808-AES Digital Audio Router
CR0808-AV Analog Video Router
CR0808-AA Analog Audio Router
CR16-PR Machine Control Router
[31.75]
1.25
[43.7]
1.72

Fig. 12-3: Front View of the 1RU Routers

128
 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

16 Inputs, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET IN
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOOP
IN THRU
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E146905
OUT
PS2

PS1, 16 Outputs, BNC 75W

Power conn.
Video Reference, BNC 75W
PS2,
GND Lug 0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Power conn.
Ethernet
RS-422

Fig. 12-4: Rear and Top Views of the 16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers
CR Series

129
User’s Guide
130
Drawings
Technical Details

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

16 Video Inputs, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET IN
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOOP
IN THRU
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 1 2 3 4
E146905
OUT
PS2

PS1,
Power conn.
4 Video Outputs, BNC 75W
PS2,
Power conn. Video Reference, BNC 75W
0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
GND Lug
RS-422
Ethernet

Fig. 12-5: Rear and Top Views of the 16×4 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and AV Routers
 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

8 Inputs, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET IN
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOOP
IN THRU
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E146905
OUT
PS2

PS1, 8 Outputs, BNC 75W

Power conn. 0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Video Reference, BNC 75W
PS2,
GND Lug
Power conn.
Ethernet
RS-422

Fig. 12-6: Rear and Top Views of the 8×8 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, and AV Routers
CR Series

131
User’s Guide
132
Drawings
Technical Details

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

Inputs 1–8, BNC 75W Inputs 9–16, BNC 75W

PS1 CTRL VIDEO

REF
ETHERNET
9K50
1.72 1.25 DC 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
LOOP
IN THRU OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS
[43.7] [31.75] +12V 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
E146905

PS2

PS1, Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16

Fig. 12-7: Rear and Top Views of the CR1616-AV

Power conn. BNC 75W BNC 75W

PS2, Video Reference, BNC 75W

Power conn. 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
GND Lug
RS-422 Ethernet
 2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.7] 17.216 [437.3]

PS1, Ethernet
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32
(power)

PS1 CTRL ETHERNET E146905

1.72 1.25 DC VIDEO INPUTS 1 2 4 INPUTS

IN REF 3 1-8OUTPUTS 9-16 17-24 25-32
[43.7] [31.75] +12V LOOP 5 6 8
9K50 THRU
7

Fig. 12-8: Rear and Top Views of the CR1616-AA

PS2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16 Outputs 17–24 Outputs 25–32

PS2,
(power) GND Lug Fan
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
RS-485 Video Reference, BNC 75W
CR Series

133
User’s Guide
134
Drawings
Technical Details

2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.7] 17.216 [437.3]

PS1, Ethernet Lexan Cover Plate

Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16
(power)

PS1 CTRL ETHERNET E146905

1.72 1.25 DC VIDEO INPUTS 1 2 4 INPUTS

IN REF 3 1-8OUTPUTS 9-16 17-24 25-32
[43.7] [31.75] +12V LOOP 5 6 8
9K50 THRU
7

Fig. 12-9: Rear and Top Views of the CR0808-AA

PS2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS

Outputs 1–8 Outputs 9–16

PS2,
(power) GND Lug Fan
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
RS-485 Video Reference, BNC 75W
 2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.7] 17.216 [437.3]

PS1, Ethernet
Inputs 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32
(power)

PS1 CTRL ETHERNET E146905

1.72 1.25 DC VIDEO INPUTS 1 2 4 INPUTS

IN REF 3 1-8OUTPUTS 9-16 17-24 25-32
[43.7] [31.75] +12V LOOP 5 6 8
9K50 THRU
7

PS2 OUTPUTS

Fig. 12-10: Rear and Top Views of the CR1604-AA

Outputs 1–8
PS2,
(power) GND Lug Fan
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
RS-485 Video Reference, BNC 75W
CR Series

135
User’s Guide
136
Drawings
Technical Details

1.41max 1.29 max

[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

PS1 CTRL
9K50
ETHERNET
1.72 1.25 DC
IN
[43.7] [31.75] +12V
E146905 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PORTS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PS2

Fig. 12-11: Rear and Top Views of the CR16-PR

PS1, 16 Bidirectional Ports, RJ-45
Power conn. GND Lug
PS2, Ethernet
RS-422 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
Power conn.
 CR Series
User’s Guide

[20.8]
0.82

[42.2]
1.66
[12.7]

[21.1]
0.50

0.86
Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock Button

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Destination Lock Button
Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]

Destination Buttons (1–16)

Source Buttons (1–16)
Knurled Screws (2x)

Fig. 12-12: Front and Top Views of the CP1616 Control Panel
Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a
CRSC system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

137
Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[42.2]
1.66
[12.7]

[21.1]
0.50

0.86
Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock Button

CP0808

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Destination Lock Button
Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]

Destination Buttons (1–16)

Source Buttons (1–16)
Knurled Screws (2x)

Fig. 12-13: Front and Top Views of the CP0808 Control Panel
Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a
CRSC system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

138
 CR Series
User’s Guide

[20.8]
0.82

[42.2]
1.66
[12.7]

[21.1]
0.50

0.86

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Power Supply LEDs
Panel Lock Button

CP1604

CP1602
Destination Lock Button
Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]
Source Buttons (1–16)

Destination Buttons (1–4)

Destination Buttons (1, 2)

Knurled Screws (2x)

Fig. 12-14: Front and Top Views of the CP1604 and CP1602 Control Panels
Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a
CRSC system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

139
140
Drawings
Technical Details

Ground Lug Ethernet

RS-422
PS1, PS2

1.41 max 1.29 max

[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

16.74 [425.2]

Power LEDs

1.72 1.25
[43.7] [31.75]

Cover Plate over Control

Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x 16-Pos. Rotary Switch
Panel Connector
0.375 x 0.25 [9.5 x 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x

Fig. 12-15: Front and Top Views of the RP16 Remote Panel Module
 1.41 max 1.29 max
[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

(pin 1)

PS1 CTRL 9K50

CONFIG
ON DIP
ETHERNET
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.72 1.25 DC
[43.7] [31.75] IN
+12V E146905

PS2

(unused)
PS1,
Power conn. GND Lug
Ethernet
0.375 × 0.25 [9.5 × 6.35] Mounting Slots, 4x
PS2,
Power conn. RS-422

Fig. 12-16: Rear and Top Views of the RP16 Remote Panel Module
CR Series

141
User’s Guide
142
Drawings
Technical Details

Remote Panel Module

1.29 max 1.41 max

[32.77] [35.81]
2.23 max
[56.6]
0.50 [12.7]

Control Panel

19.0 [482.6]
17.62 [447.5]
16.74 [425.2]

Fig. 12-17: Front and Top Views of an RP16 and Control Panel Assembly
 CR Series
User’s Guide

CQX Routers and Control Panel

16

8
15

7
AUX
14

6
13

5
12

4
11

3
CQX
10

2
9

1
OUT
BYP 2
BYP 1
GPI/O
8

16.74 [425.2]
17.60 [447.0]

19.0 [482.6]
19.0 [482.6]

7
6
5

E146905
4
3
2
1

IN

All CQX compact routers (1RU) have the

same features and dimensions, except for
VIDEO

THRU
LOOP
REF

the legends:
Legend: Product Category
CR1602-3Gig-CQX Clean and Quiet Router
ETHERNET

CR1602-HD-CQX Clean and Quiet Router

CR1602-SD-CQX Clean and Quiet Router
CTRL
PS1

PS2
+12V
DC
IN
[31.75]

[31.75]
1.25

1.25
[43.7]

[43.7]
1.72

1.72

Fig. 12-18: Front and Rear Views of the CQX Routers

143
Technical Details
Drawings

17.60 [447.0]

19.0 [482.6]
[241.3]
9.5

[257.8]
10.15

Fig. 12-19: Top View of the CQX Routers

144
 CR Series
User’s Guide

0.485 [12.319]
[25.8]
1.017

[42.2]
1.66

[]21.1
0.83

17.62 [447.5]
16.74 [355.6]

Fig. 12-20: Front and Top Views of the CQX Panel

145
Technical Details
Drawings

2RU Routers, Control Panels, and Remote Panel Modules

BCD
A

E 2
7 89

F0 1
3 456
Power LEDs

16-Pos. Rotary Switch

Cover Plate over Control
Panel Connector
16.74 [425.2]
19.0 [482.6]

All the 2RU compact routers have the same features

and dimensions at the front, except for the legends:
Legend: Product Category
CR3204-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR3232-3Gig Digital Video Router
CR3204-HD Digital Video Router
CR3204-HD-NR Digital Video Router
CR3232-HD Digital Video Router
CR3232-HD-NR Digital Video Router
0.375 x 0.25 [9.5 x 6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x

CR3204-SD Digital Video Router

CR3204-SD-NR Digital Video Router
CR3232-SD Digital Video Router
CR3232-SD-NR Digital Video Router
‹Product Category›
‹LEGEND›

CR3204-AES Digital Audio Router

CR3232-AES Digital Audio Router
CR3204-AV Analog Video Router
CR3232-AV Analog Video Router
CR3204-AA Analog Audio Router
CR3232-AA Analog Audio Router
CR32-PR Machine Control Routing Switcher
[44.5]

[31.8]
1.75

1.25
[88.1]
3.47

Fig. 12-21: Front View of the 2RU Routers

146
 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
32 Inputs, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 LOOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[44.5] DC THRU IN
IN
+12V
PS2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.47 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

[88.1] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1.25 9K50
E146905
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OUT 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet 32 Outputs, BNC 75W
GND Lug RS-422
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x

Fig. 12-22: Rear and Top Views of the 32×32 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers
CR Series

147
User’s Guide
148
Drawings
Technical Details

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
32 Inputs, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 LOOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[44.5] DC THRU IN
IN
+12V
PS2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.47 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

[88.1] 1 2 3 4

1.25 9K50
E146905
OUT
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet 4 Outputs,
BNC 75W 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
GND Lug RS-422

Fig. 12-23: Rear and Top Views of the 32×4 3Gig, HD, SD, and AES Routers
 1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
Inputs 1–16, BNC 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20
LOOP
[44.5] DC THRU 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
IN 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
+12V
PS2
3.47 OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS
[88.1]

9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28
1.25 9K50
E146905 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32

Fig. 12-24: Rear and Top Views of the CR3232-AV

[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet Outputs 1–16 Outputs 17–32
GND Lug BNC 75W BNC 75W
RS-422
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
CR Series

149
User’s Guide
150
Drawings
Technical Details

1.37 1.25
[34.80] [31.75]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
Outputs 1–4, BNC 75W Inputs 1–16, BNC 75W Inputs 17–32, BNC 75W

CTRL
VIDEO
ETHERNET REF
PS1
1.75 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20
LOOP
[44.5] DC THRU OUTPUTS 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
IN 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24
+12V
PS2
3.47 INPUTS OUTPUTS
[88.1]

9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28
1.25 9K50
E14690 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32

Fig. 12-25: Rear and Top Views of the CR3204-AV

[31.8] 5

PS2
Ethernet
GND Lug RS-422 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
 2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.6] 17.216 [437.3]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
I/O 1–8 I/O 9–16 I/O 33–40 I/O 41–48

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1
1.75 VIDEO OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
REF 1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48
[44.5] DC LOOP
IN THRU

Fig. 12-26: Rear and Top Views of the CR3232-AA

+12V
INPUTS INPUTS
PS2
3.47
[88.1]
INPUTS INPUTS

1.25 9K50 17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

E146905 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet I/O 17–24 I/O 25–32 I/O 49–56 I/O 57–64

GND Lug RS-485

Fan 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
CR Series

151
User’s Guide
152
Drawings
Technical Details

2.24 2.12
[56.9] [53.8]

19.0 [482.6]

0.892 [22.6] 17.216 [437.3]

Video Reference, BNC 75W

PS1
I/O 1–8 Inputs 9–16 Inputs 33–40 Inputs 41–48

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1
1.75 VIDEO OUTPUTS
REF 1-8 9-16 33-40 41-48
[44.5] DC LOOP
IN THRU

Fig. 12-27: Rear and Top Views of the CR3204-AA

+12V
INPUTS INPUTS
PS2
3.47
[88.1]
INPUTS INPUTS

1.25 9K50 17-24 25-32 49-56 57-64

E146905
[31.8]

PS2 Inputs 17–24 Inputs 25–32 Inputs 49–56 Inputs 57–64

Ethernet

GND Lug RS-485

Fan 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
 1.41max 1.29 max
[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.884 [22.5] 17.24 [437.9]

PS1
Bidirectional Ports 1–16

CTRL
ETHERNET
PS1
1.75
[44.5] DC
IN
+12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PS2
3.47 PORTS
[88.1]

Fig. 12-28: Rear and Top Views of the CR32-PR

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1.25 9K50
E146905
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet Bidirectional Ports 17–32
GND Lug RS-422
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
CR Series

153
User’s Guide
Technical Details
Drawings

[20.8]
0.82

[86.6]
3.41

1.705
[12.7]

[43.3]
0.50

Power Supply LEDs

Panel Lock Button
Destination Lock Button

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]

Destination Buttons (1–32)

Source Buttons (1–32)
Knurled Screws (2x)

Fig. 12-29: Front and Top Views of the CP3232 Control Panel
Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a
CRSC system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

154
 CR Series
User’s Guide

[20.8]
0.82

[86.6]
3.41

1.705
[12.7]

[43.3]
0.50

Power Supply LEDs

Panel Lock Button
Destination Lock Button

Level Selection Buttons 1–4

Connector to Router

16.74 [425.2]
17.62 [447.5]
Source Buttons (1–32)

Destination Buttons (1–4)

Knurled Screws (2x)

Fig. 12-30: Front and Top Views of the CP3204 Control Panel
Except for the lock buttons, the button designations do not apply when the panel is used in a
CRSC system.
None of the button designations applies when the panel is used in an NV9000 system.

155
156
Drawings
Technical Details

RS-422 Ground Lug

Ethernet PS1, PS2

1.41 max 1.29 max

[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

16.74 [425.2]

Power LEDs

1.75 7 89
A
3 456
BCD

E 2
[44.5] F0 1

3.47
[88.1]

1.25
[31.8]

Fig. 12-31: Front and Top Views of the RP32 Remote Panel Module
Cover Plate over Control 16-Pos. Rotary Switch
Screw Holes for Control Panel, 2x
Panel Connector
0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
 1.41max 1.29 max
[35.81] [32.77]

19.0 [482.6]

0.88 [22.4] 17.24 [437.9]

PS1
(unused)

CTRL
CONFIG
ON DIP
ETHERNET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PS1
1.75
[44.5] DC
IN
+12V
PS2
3.47
[88.1]

1.25 9K50
E146905
[31.8]

PS2
Ethernet 0.375×0.25 [9.5×6.35] Mounting Slots, 6x
GND Lug RS-422

Fig. 12-32: Rear and Top Views of the RP32 Remote Panel Module
CR Series

157
User’s Guide
158
Drawings
Technical Details

Remote Panel Module

1.29max 1.41max
[32.77] [35.81]
2.23
[56.6]
0.50 [12.7]

Control Panel

19.0 [482.6]
17.62 [447.5]
16.74 [425.2]

7 89
A
3 456
BCD

E 2
F0 1

Fig. 12-33: Front and Top Views of an RP32 and Control Panel Assembly
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Defaults
Default Router State
The factory-default state is to be in stand-alone mode.
The default routing state of a compact router is for input 1 to connect to output 1, input 2 to
connect to output 2, and so on for all inputs and outputs. This is called a diagonal routing. (After
you have made routing changes, the power-up state of the inputs and outputs is the state you
last created.)
 If the router’s rotary switch is at position 0, the router will reset to its factory-default state at
power-up.
For machine control routers, a diagonal route means that the ports are tri-stated (disabled). The
initial (and default) state of machine control ports is “dynamic” and diagonal.

Default Remote Panel Module State

The factory-default state of a remote panel module is to be in stand-alone mode.
 If the remote panel module’s rotary switch is at position 0, it will reset to its factory-default
state at power-up.

Initial Control Panel State

The initial control panel state at power up is “Panel Lock” with all levels selected. Before
performing an operation on any control panel (remote or local) you must turn off its panel lock.
 Remember that a Panel Lock button locks that panel. It does not lock a router, a remote
panel module, other control panels, or the network.

Control Panel Configuration in NV9000-SE Utilities

The initial remote panel configuration (RP16 or RP32) is empty. It has no default destination and
no status monitor output.

CQX Transition Rates

The CQX routers support 3 transition rates: slow, medium, and fast. The actual rate is adjusted in
the router to make the transition times of the different routers uniform:

Transition Period (in Frames)

Video Format Slow Medium Fast

1080i, 59.94, NTSC 90 60 30

1080i, 50, PAL 75 50 25

720p, 50 150 100 50

720p, 60 180 120 60

Thus, slow is nominally 3 seconds, medium is 2 seconds, and fast is 1 second. At 59.94 Hz (or
29.97 Hz), of course, the transition periods are actually 1.001, 2.002, or 3.003 seconds.

159
Technical Details
Defaults

Cut transitions do not involve a transition rate. The video transition of a cut is instantaneous. In a
cut, however, the audio fades down over 3 frames and fades back up over 3 frames.
The nominal times for video fades with audio are expressed in seconds. The transition time for
audio cuts is always 3 frames and the exact duration of a frame varies with the video rate. Note
that 3 frames at progressive video rates (e.g., 720p) occur twice as fast as for interlaced video
rates.
This table describes the transitions over a 2-second transition:

Transition Description
Fade-fade Video and audio ramp down over 1 second, then ramp up over 1 second, for a total of
2 seconds (nominal).

Fade-cut Video and audio ramp down over 2 seconds, then video switches immediately and
audio ramps up over 3 frames, for a total of 2 seconds plus 3 frames.

Cut-fade Audio ramps down over 3 frames. Then video and audio ramp up over 2 seconds, for a
total of 2 seconds plus 3 frames

Again, for a cut transition, audio ramps down over 3 frames, then ramps up over 3 frames, for a total of 6
frames. The video cut is instantanteous at the transition from the third frame to the fourth frame.

160
 Misc. Topics

Chapter 13 provides the following.

Topics
NV9000 Network Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
NV9000 Router Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Power Cord Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

NV9000 Network Example

This is a simple example. It uses a 16×16 SD router, a 32×32 AES router, and a CP1616 (remote
panel) to route 16 sources having 3 levels (SD, AES1/2, and AES3/4) to 16 destination devices
having the same levels. For the sake of simplicity, assume that all the source devices are identical
and all the output devices (the destinations) are identical.
Any take will route all 3 levels from one of 16 sources to one of 16 destinations.

Connectivity
This diagram shows the connections of the routers and the remote panel’s button assignments:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AES
IN
AES12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AES34

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUT 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CP1616
Source 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREV SLVO
SRC 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Dest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SLVO SLVO SLVO SLVO

2 3 4 5

161
Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

The AES router, with 32 inputs and 32 outputs, allows two levels for 16 sources and two levels for
16 destinations. The SD router, of course, provides one level for 16 sources and 16 destinations.
The panel is straightforward, having 16 source buttons and 16 destination buttons. Takes are
simple: press a destination button then press a source button. The ‘Previous Source’ button
allows you to undo a mistake.
There are 5 salvo buttons. In this example, the actual salvos are left undefined. You will use
NV9000-SE Utilities to define salvos. It is not complex.

Initial Setup
Levels
This figure shows the initial level setup in CRSC:

The levels are number 1, 2, and 3. The AES router defines 2 of the levels. Note how the inputs
and outputs are partitioned at the right. (The 32x32 AES routers have 64 inputs and 64 outputs.
The inputs occur in pairs on the input connectors. The outputs occur in pairs on the output
connectors.)
 In NV9000-SE Utilities, you will represent the pairs by their odd-numbered inputs or outputs.

Remote Panel
This figure shows the initial remote panel setup in CRSC:

162
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Routers
This figure shows the ‘Routers’ page in NV9000-SE Utilities:

Two routers were defined. This configuration page defines the AES Router:

163
Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

This configuration page defines the SD Router:

The AES router defines two physical levels. The SD router defines one physical level.

164
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Levels
The simple example defines one level set “All Levels”:

Note the correspondence between the virtual levels here and the levels defined in CRSC.
Note also the mapping of the virtual levels to the physical levels of the routers.

Devices
It is by creating “devices” that you enumerate the I/O connections of your routers.
Each device you define is assigned to a level set. In this example, there is just one level set.
In NV9000-SE Utilities, you have a choice for entering device data: you can use the ‘Devices’
configuration page, the ‘Add Device’ page (under the ‘Tasks’ pane) or the ‘Add Multiple Devices’
page (also under ‘Tasks’).

165
Misc. Topics
NV9000 Network Example

This figure illustrates the I/Os for one device:

The device illustrated is named “input 1.” In this example, the other devices are named “input m”
or “output n.” In your system, of course, you may name the devices as you like.
As a general rule, you assign numbers in the ‘Input’ column to input devices and numbers in the
‘Output’ column to output devices.
The numbers for inputs and outputs are subject to the ranges you listed for the partitions (phys-
ical levels) you defined in the definition of the routers.
In the case of the AES34 level, the range of inputs is 33–64 (in pairs). Thus, the first input is 33.
However, for AES routers, inputs always occur in pairs on the connectors. The first connector for
the AES34 level carries inputs 33 and 34. That pair is represented by its odd input, 33.
Other input pairs follow the same pattern.
 Although analog audio inputs and outputs are paired, you use the pair number in NV9000-
SE Utilities, not the input number. For example, you refer to input pair (17,18) as input 9.

166
 CR Series
User’s Guide

The following table is the result of device entry for this example:

Note that the input and output pairs are represented by the odd-numbered member of the pair.

Panel
This figure shows the panel configuration for the simple example:

The example has no default destination and no status monitor output. It does have a ‘Previous
Source’ button and 5 salvo buttons. This example leaves the salvos undefined. You cannot actu-
ally assign a salvo to a button until it has been defined.
The names of your inputs and outputs appear as the button legends here in the configuration
page. The names of your salvos appear as the button legends. These names do not appear on
the actual remote panel. (You can create physical button legend inserts using graphics and text.)

167
Misc. Topics
NV9000 Router Control Systems

NV9000 Router Control Systems

The name of Miranda’s NVISION series router control system is NV9000. There are 3 system
controllers in the NV9000 family: the NV960, the NV920, and the NV915. Each of the system
controllers is a host to the NV9000 router control software. The NV9000 software supports many
different types of control panels.
The NV9000 system offer features and services not available in the CR Series routers alone.

NV9000
NV9000 systems can be ordered in different configurations, characterized in part by the number
of Ethernet and serial ports available. In any case, an NV9000 system includes:
• A system controller
• Control panels or GUIs
• Routers
The system controller software fields commands (button presses) at the control panels, inter-
prets them, issues instructions to all the routers in the network, obtains status from the routers,
and relays the status back to the control panels as visual feedback for the operator.

Configuration Database
The NV9000 control system uses a standard, SQL-compliant, off-the-shelf database manage-
ment system in which to create configuration databases. System administrators may develop
their own tools to import and export data.
The NV960, NV920, and NV915 system controllers are configured using NV9000-SE Utilities.

Lock, Protect, and Release

In a router control system, both source and destination devices can be locked or protected. Lock
and protect options include:
• Locks and protects made in the system controller.
• Locks and protects made in the router.
• Locks and protects disabled.
In a router control system, the default setting for each of the destination lock and destination
protect configuration settings is “in the system controller.” The default setting for each of the
source lock and source protect configuration settings is “None.”
NV9000 locks and protects can apply to sources and destinations connected to compact
routers. However, operators cannot perform locks or protects at a CR Series remote panel.
You must configure the compact router locks as “in system.” The NV9000 does not recognize any
locks made locally.
CR Series control panels do not show status for locks made in the NV9000 system. NV96xx
panels do show the status of locks made in the NV9000 system.

168
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Compact Routers in an NV9000 System

Installing one or more Compact Routers on an NV9000 network requires Ethernet connections,
a system configuration generated by NV9000-SE Utilities and uploaded to the system controller,
and one or more control panels, either NV96xx panels or CR Series remote panels.
Figure 13-1 shows a typical NV9000 router control system as it applies to Compact Routers:
Video
Reference
E’net GUI
Video Router (House Network)
(Router & Panel
Network)

•••
Auto-
mation E’net System
Audio Router
Switch Controller
•••

Port Router
Panels
Compact Routers
NV9000-SE
Configuration Utilities
Database
Fig. 13-1: NV9000 Router Control System Schema
The choice of routers and number of routers, of course, depends on your requirements. An
NV96xx control panel is not strictly required, but strongly recommended.
 You must use CRSC to perform the initial setup of routers and remote panels for an NV9000
network.

Network Connection
Use CAT5 Ethernet cable and follow these simple steps:
1 Connect your Ethernet switch to the “Router and Panel Network” port of the NV9000 host
computer.
2 Connect each router to the Ethernet switch.
You must assign a unique IP address to each router and designate at least one physical level
(partition) for each router.
3 Connect your remote panel(s) to the Ethernet switch.
You must either assign a unique IP address to each remote panel or specify that the panel is
to be identified by DHCP.
Refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide or its on-line help for detailed information.
Following are important points about compact routers in an NV9000 system.

169
Misc. Topics
Compact Routers in an NV9000 System

Configuration Differences
Under an NV9000 control system, the compact routers and remote panels are slightly different:
• Level sets.
NV9000-SE Utilities uses level sets to define virtual levels and physical levels. Under CRSC or
in standalone situations, compact routers do not have the concept of a level set or virtual
level. Under CRSC, the idea of physical levels is informal.
NV9000-SE Utilities uses “devices” sets to define inputs and outputs. CRSC defines inputs and
outputs in its panel configurations.
In stand-alone systems, inputs and outputs are not “defined” at all, but simply connected.
• DHCP.
Under NV9000, panels may be identified by DHCP. The NV9000 does this at startup. A CRSC
network does not have DHCP. Stand-alone configurations not using CRSC rely on the rotary
switch positions to designation IP addresses and levels.
• Locks and Protects.
Under NV9000, remote panels have no locks or protects. Under CRSC, remote panels may
have destination locks (and panel locks). In standalone configurations, panels may have des-
tination locks (and panel locks).

Operational Differences
Under an NV9000 control system, a compact router system differs slightly from other systems:
• Takes
Under NV9000, takes are very simple and all-level. Press Dst, press Src. Possibly just Src if the
remote panel is configured with a default destination only.
Under CRSC, takes are complex, involving button colors, level selection and ordering of level
selection, destination locks, and so forth.
• Other panels and other routers.
Your NV9000 system might have NV96xx panels and other routers in addition to CR Series
equipment. Certain other panels have features not available to CR Series remote panels. For
example, the NV9601 supports the selection of devices by category and suffix (or category
and index). Most NV96xx panels support locks, protects, and force release. CR Series panels
do not have these features.
With other routers, the number of sources and destinations you can control can far exceed
the number of devices connected to CR Series routers.
• Locks
Under NV9000, remote panels cannot perform locks or unlocks. Other panels might how-
ever lock, protect, or release sources and destinations connected to compact routers.
Under CRSC, remote panels can lock and unlock destinations, but not sources.
• Asynchronous notification
Under automation, CR Series products support the asynchronous notification feature of
Miranda’s NVISION serial protocol.

170
 CR Series
User’s Guide

AES Routers
Under an NV9000 control system, AES compact routers perform stereo switching only, regard-
less of how they are configured.
 Note that, during configuration, the AES inputs and outputs must be numbered as if they
were paired mono channels. See Devices on page 165 for configuration information.

Loss of Reference
Let N be the nominal size of the router, 16 or 32.
If an AES router transitions from synchronous mode to asynchronous, it re-writes the 2N×2N
matrix as an N×N matrix and the 2N×2N route table is lost. That is one of the reasons for the
15-minute delay before such a transition.
When the AES router re-writes the matrix, it attempts to preserve as much of the 2N×2N infor-
mation as possible. Thus,
• If an output pair has a “left” signal from input N in its “left” channel, the output pair becomes
N-left, N-right.
• If an output pair has a “left” signal from input N in its “right” channel, the output pair
becomes N-left, N-right.
• If an output pair has no “left” signal at all, the router chooses the input number (N) from its
output’s “left” channel, and the output pair becomes N-left, N-right.
This method has been described as “right follows left.”
 This behavior would be important to engineers only when loss of reference occurs. It has no
bearing on normal operation.

Cabling
Analog Audio Routers
Miranda offers a breakout cable for DB25 connectors of analog audio routers. The part number
is WC0053.
Each DB25 connector supports 8 inputs (or outputs):
GND 8 No. 4 No. 6 5 GND
– 20 17 –
+ 7 4 + I/O Connections
GND 11 No. 2 No. 8 2 GND Number Stereo Designation
– 23 14 – 1 1L
+ 10 (n.c.) 13 1 1 +
2 1R
3 2L
4 2R
25 14
5 3L
GND 25 No. 1 No. 7 16 GND 6 3R
– 12 3 –
7 4L
+ 24 15 +
GND 22 No. 3 No. 5 19 GND 8 4R
– 9 6 –
+ 21 18 +

For 16×16 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and 25–32,
respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs (and outputs) are treated
as 16 stereo pairs.
For 32×32 routers, the connectors provide inputs (or outputs) 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40,
41–48, 49–56, and 57–64, respectively, and are labelled that way on the rear of the router. Inputs
(and outputs) are treated as 32 stereo pairs.

171
Misc. Topics
Ordering Information

For 32×4 routers, the connectors provide inputs 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56,
and 57–64, respectively. The inputs and outputs are labelled accordingly. The inputs are treated
as 32 stereo pairs. The single output connector provides outputs 1–8 (4 stereo pairs). The inputs
and outputs are labelled accordingly.

Machine Control Routers

Many VTRs and other devices provide a DE9 connector for machine control. The machine
control routers have RJ-45 connectors. Customers will need RJ45-to-DE9 cables (or some other
means of connecting to DE9 ports.
This is the RJ-45 to DE9 mapping for RS-422:
RJ-45 DE9
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9

This cable wiring is applicable whether the port is a controlling port or controlled port.

Ordering Information
These are the 1RU CR Series components:

CRPS1 12V power supply, 4-pin Molex connector, with cord, and cord retention strap.
CR1616-3Gig 16×16 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR1616-HD 16×16 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1616-HD-NR 16×16 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1616-SD 16×16 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1616-SD-NR 16×16 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1616-AES 16×16 AES Digital Audio Router.
CR1616-AV 16×16 Analog Video Router.
CR1616-AA 16×16 Analog Audio Router.
CR1604-3Gig 16×4 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR1604-HD 16×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1604-HD-NR 16×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1604-SD 16×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR1604-SD-NR 16×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR1604-AV 16×4 Analog Video Router.
CR1604-AA 16×4 Analog Audio Router.
CR1602-3Gig-CQX 16×2 “3Gig” Clean and Quiet Digital Video Router.
CR1602-HD-CQX 16×2 High-Definition Clean and Quiet Digital Video Router.

172
 CR Series
User’s Guide

CR1602-SD-CQX 16×2 Standard-Definition Clean and Quiet Digital Video Router.

CR0808-3Gig 8×8 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR0808-HD 8×8 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR0808-HD-NR 8×8 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR0808-SD 8×8 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR0808-SD-NR 8×8 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR0808-AV 8×8 Analog Video Router.
CR0808-AA 8×8 Analog Audio Router.
CR16-PR 16-Port Machine Control Router.
CP1602-CQX 16×2 Clean and Quiet Control Panel.
CP1616 16×16 Control Panel.
CP1604 16×4 Control Panel.
CP1602 16×2 Control Panel.
CP0808 8×8 Control Panel.
CP3201 32×1 Control Panel. (This is a 1RU panel!)
RP16 16×16 Remote Panel Module (requires a control panel to function).

These are the 2RU CR Series components:

CR3204-3Gig 32×4 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.

CR3204-HD 32×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR3204-HD-NR 32×4 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3204-SD 32×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router
CR3204-SD-NR 32×4 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3204-AES 32×4 AES Digital Audio Router
CR3204-AV 32×4 Analog Video Router
CR3204-AA 32×4 Analog Audio Router
CR3232-3Gig 32×32 “3Gig” Digital Video Router.
CR3232-HD 32×32 High-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR3232-HD-NR 32×32 High-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3232-SD 32×32 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router.
CR3232-SD-NR 32×32 Standard-Definition Digital Video Router, Non-Reclocking.
CR3232-AES 32×32 AES Digital Audio Router.
CR3232-AV 32×32 Analog Video Router.
CR3232-AA 32×32 Analog Audio Router.
CR32-PR 32-Port Machine Control Router.
CP3204 32×4 Control Panel.
CP3232 32×32 Control Panel.
RP32 32×32 Remote Panel Module (requires a control panel to function).

173
Misc. Topics
Ordering Information

These are other associated components:

SB0033-xx CR Series software and documentation CD.

SV0679-xx CRConfig (software).
SV0904-01 CRSC (Compact Router System Configurator installer).
IG0002-00 Button legend template (Word document).
IG0003-00 Button legend template (Illustrator document).
IG0004-00 Button legend template (Freehand document).
WC0053-xx DB25 breakout cable.

174
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Power Cord Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies
Use the supplied retention strap to keep the AC power cord firmly connected to the power
supply. Follow these steps to use the strap:
1 Firmly insert the AC power cord into the power supply. Examine the last figure in this section
to see how the strap should be applied.
2 Placed the Velcro retention strap, fuzzy side up, on top of the power supply with the buckle
loop approximately 1 inch from the AC input side and the remaining strap around the cord
end and down:

3 Holding the buckle in place, lift the strap up and around the cord end so the strap overlaps
itself:

4 Holding the buckle loop in place, route the strap around the back of the supply diagonally
across so that it sticks out on the left below the output cord:

5 Continue the strap around toward the buckle loop and through the loop. Cinch the strap
tightly. While keeping tension, place the 2 inch strap end (with Velcro loops) down on the
fuzzy part to complete the process:

6 Examine the strap though its path around the cord and power supply. Be sure that no slack
exists and that it is tight the full length of the strap. If necessary, adjust and cinch it more
tightly.

175
Misc. Topics
Power Cord Retention for the PS0001 and PS0012 Power Supplies

176
 Glossary

AES/EBU (Audio Engineering Society/European Broadcasting Union). AES and EBU are standards
organizations.
AES3, AES3id AES/EBU formulated this professional serial interface in 1992. The standard typically transmits
PCM and Dolby Digital 5.1, but is not tied to any particular sampling rate or any particular audio
format.
Miranda’s compact AES routers support AES3id and provide 75W BNC connectors. AES3id is
specified for 75W coaxial cable up to 1000 meters.
Asynchro- As it applies to the compact AES routers, “asynchronous” means switched without a video refer-
nous ence signal. In asynchronous mode, the AES router passes the input to the output unmodified.
Breakaway A route where signals are taken from different sources. A breakaway might, for example, take
video from one source and audio from another source.
CQX An abbreviation for “clean and quiet.”
Device A device is a grouping of input and output ports that define a logical entity. (The logical entity
does not have to be a real entity.) For example, a system might have 3 levels: video, AES, and
time code. A hypothetical device in this system is Camera 1, which consists of video on input
port 1 of the video router, AES on input port 5 of the AES router, and time code on input port 8
of the time code router. (You can use an analog audio router to router time-code signals.)
DVB-ASI (Digital Video Broadcast — Asynchronous Signal Interface) A transmission scheme for MPEG-2
payloads at up to 270 Mbps. It was developed for transmission over long distances subject to
high noise levels.
High-tally Bright, in reference to a lamp or LED.
Hold During a breakaway take, the level selections remain unchanged. (‘No Hold’ means that levels
are selected anew at the next source or next destination.
Input/output Inputs and outputs are the physical connections on the back of the router. The term “input port”
is used interchangeably with “input” and the term “output port” is used interchangeably with
“output.”
IP address A 32-bit number that identifies a device on an Ethernet LAN. The address is commonly
expressed as a series of 4 numbers separated by periods. Each of the 4 numbers represents 8 of
the 32 bits.
Level In a compact router system, a (physical) level is the same thing as a router partition. (The parti-
tion can be the entire router.)
Lock A “destination lock” protects a destination from being switched to a different source. A “panel
lock” prevents accidental changes at a panel.
Low-tally Dim, in reference to a lamp or LED.
Operator The term operator refers to control panel users as opposed to system configurers or system
administrators. An operator is responsible for making the routes.

177
Glossary

Port In general, a port is a physical connection on a router. For compact machine control routers, a
port is a bidirectional serial connector. A machine control router is also called a port router.
Remote Panel A CR Series product that sends take and lock messages to routers in a CR Series network. The
Module remote panel module receives commands from an attached CR Series control panel. The remote
panel module receives status messages from the routers in the network, and in turn, illuminates
its control panel buttons according to the status messages.
The remote panel module is also a place to mount a control panel.
Primary level A destination’s primary level is the first level in the list of levels assigned to the destination.
Salvo A salvo is a stored group of takes that can be recalled and executed at a control panel.
Source/ The term “source device” is used interchangeably with “source” and the term “destination
Destination device” is used interchangeably with “destination.” A source is a device that is connected to one
or more input ports. A destination is a device that is connected to one or more output ports. An
example of such a device would be a monitor.
A device can be both a source and destination. An example of such a device is a VTR.
Subnet mask A 32-bit number that distinguishes the common part of an IP address from the unique part. For
two IP addresses [Link] and [Link], the common parts are 192.168.2 and the
unique parts are 10 and 30 respectively. The common part has 24 bits. The subnet mask in this
example is [Link].
SWB (Super Wide Band). A term originated by Miranda’s NVISION business group that refers to the
ability of a router to pass a wide range of digital bit rates and formats. Miranda’s SWB supports
data rates from 10 Mbps to about 1.5 Gbps. The HD-SDI routers reclock at 143, 177, 270, 360, and
540MB/s and 1.483 and 1.485Gb/s. The HD routers bypass re-clocking for non-video rates.
Synchronous As it applies to the AES routers, “synchronous” means switched in relation to the sync obtained
from a video reference signal. The AES routers perform certain functions when in “synchronous”
mode, namely (1) outputting an AES stream at 48kHz, and (2) switching mono channels.
Take A take is a route. The panel operator “takes” a source (to a destination).
3Gig The term “3Gig” describes Miranda devices capable of operating at 2.97 Gb/s or 2.966 Gb/s1 and
lower rates. (They reclock at 2.97 Gb/s, 2.966 Gb/s, 270 MB/s, 1.483 Gb/s,1 and 1.485 Gb/s).

1. 2.97 / 1.001; 1.485 / 1.001

178
 CR Series
User’s Guide

179
Glossary

180
 Index

0–9 A
16×16 control panel Acrobat usage
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
16×16 remote panel module navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Address, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53–56, 59–60, 169, 177
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 AES
16×16 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–10 Audio Engineering Society . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–11 mono switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 171, 178
16×2 control panel, features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18, 26, 30, 32, 36–37, 172–173
16×2 CQX router stereo switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 AES routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 128–131, 146–148
16×4 control panel, features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 AES/EBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
16×4 router, features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 AES3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
1RU control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39–40 AES3id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 177
1RU remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Africa, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
1RU router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Agreement, license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Americas, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Analog
2RU control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 audio router . 3–4, 19, 25, 28, 33–34, 37, 50, 121, 128,
2RU remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133–135, 146, 151–152, 171–173
2RU router audio router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 audio router, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
32×32 control panel audio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41–42 video router 3–4, 17, 26–27, 32–33, 119, 128, 132, 146,
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149–150, 172–173
32×32 remote panel module, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 video router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
32×32 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 video specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Analog audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11 Analog video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130–131, 146
32×4 control panel, features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Asia, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
32×4 router, features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Assembly
3Gig video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–49
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 72, 81 RP16 and CP1616, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . 142
routers . . . . . . . .3–4, 12, 26, 30, 32, 125, 128–131, 143, RP32 and CP3232, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . 158
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148 Asynchronous AES routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
3Gig video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Audio
8×8 router, features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
router, AES . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 36–37, 128–131, 146–148
router, analog 3–4, 19, 25, 28, 33–34, 37, 50, 121, 128,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133–135, 146, 151–152, 171–173

181
Index

router, digital . . .3–4, 17–18, 32, 36–37, 119, 128–129, Chapters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148, 172–173 1, Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
specifications, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 2, Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
specifications, digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 3, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 4, Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Automation connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 5, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 87, 93, 95, 97, 101
Automation, third-party systems . . . . . . . . . . .6, 25, 46, 122 6, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7, Technical Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8, Misc. Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
B China, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Clean and quiet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Compact router 2, 9, 25, 45–46, 49, 53–55, 57–59, 87, 122,
Block diagram
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
AES router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
analog video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Compact router system configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 9
CQX digital video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Configuration
digital audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168–169
digital video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 16
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connectors
BNC connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 25, 48, 50, 72, 81, 177
automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Bold-face or capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 25, 48, 50, 72, 81, 177
Bookmarks, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–49
Breakaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
DB25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 34, 50, 171
Breakout cable, WC0053 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 171, 174
DE9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 172
Button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
input, output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 81
Button legend template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 42, 50, 84, 88, 98, 102, 105
Button legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Button mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36–38
Contact Miranda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 99
Control panel .2–4, 6, 12, 14, 16–19, 21–23, 25, 37–42, 45,
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 21–23, 36–38
. . . . . . . 47–49, 72, 80, 91, 107, 109, 142, 158, 173
destination . . . . . 21, 23, 36–37, 84–86, 91–92, 99–100
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23, 36–38
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 99
NV96xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47, 169
initial states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 15
legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–49, 72, 81
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 47, 49, 83, 87, 93, 95, 97, 101
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 18, 46, 49, 168–171
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21–23, 36–37, 84–86, 91, 99–100
Controlled port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 35, 51, 85, 172
Buttons, level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 106
Controlling port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 35, 51, 85, 172
Controlling v. controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Corporate office, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
C CP0808 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 138, 173
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cable front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48–49, 169 CP1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 21, 39, 173
length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 81 front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Capital or bold-face letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CP1602-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 145, 173
Captive panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 front view, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi CP1604 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 21, 39, 173
CD, software and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42
Change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii CP1616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 21–22, 39–40, 137, 173
Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39–40

182
 CR Series
User’s Guide

front view, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CR3204-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173

top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 CR3204-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
CP3201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 CR3232-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
CP3204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 23, 42, 173 CR3232-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 151, 173
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 CR3232-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
CP3232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 22–23, 41, 154–155, 173 CR3232-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 149, 173
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 CR3232-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 CR3232-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
front view, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23 CR3232-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41–42 CR3232-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
CP6464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 40 CR32-PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5, 146, 153
CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 CR6400 router
CQX control panel, photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 25, 30, 47, 101
CQX digital video routers . . . . . .5, 119, 143, 144, 172–173 Creating a router network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
CQX operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 CRPS1 (power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 172
CQX panel (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 51, 55–56, 58, 63
CQX router CRSC networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 93
front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
CR Series . . . . 2–3, 5, 8–9, 18, 25, 45, 47, 71, 83, 87, 93, 95,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 101, 122, 168, 172–173
D
CR0808-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 173
Data reverse (mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 85
CR0808-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 134, 173
Database, configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168–169
CR0808-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 128
DB25 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 34, 50, 171
CR0808-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 173
DE9 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 172
CR0808-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 173
Declaration of Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
CR0808-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 173
Default remote panel module state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CR0808-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 173
Default router state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CR0808-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 173
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CR1602-3Gig-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 172
Design considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
CR1602-HD-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 172
Destination (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CR1602-SD-CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 173
Destination buttons .21, 23, 36–37, 84–86, 91–92, 99–100
CR1604-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 172
Destination lock . . . . . . . 22–23, 38, 85–86, 91–92, 99–100,
CR1604-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 135, 172
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104–105, 107–108
CR1604-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Destination locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CR1604-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 172
Device (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CR1604-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 128, 172
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
CR1604-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 128, 172
Digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
CR1604-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 128, 172
router . 3–4, 17–18, 32, 36–37, 119, 128–129, 146–148
CR1604-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 128, 172
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CR1616-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 172
Digital audio routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
CR1616-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 128, 133, 172
Digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
CR1616-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 172
router . 3–4, 12–13, 16, 26, 32, 118, 128–129, 146–148
CR1616-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 128, 132, 172
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CR1616-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 172
Digital video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
CR1616-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 172
Document, revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
CR1616-SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 128, 172
Dolby Digital 5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CR1616-SD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 128
Drawings
CR16-PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 5, 128, 136, 173
16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, AES router, rear view . . . . . . . 129
CR3204-3Gig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
16×4 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
CR3204-AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 152, 173
16×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
CR3204-AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
1RU router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 128
CR3204-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 150, 173
1RU router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–30, 33–34
CR3204-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
1RU router, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–28
CR3204-HD-NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 146, 173
2RU router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–31, 146

183
Index

2RU router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31–33, 35 Enable NV9000 mode (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
2RU router, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 34 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
32×32 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 14, 16, 125
32×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
8×8 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 42
8×8 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–49, 169
CP0808, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 105, 169
CP0808, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Ethernet switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 55, 58
CP1602, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Europe, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CP1602, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 European Broadcasting Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CP1604, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Examples, symbol for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CP1604, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 42
CP1616, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
CP1616, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39–40
CP1616, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
F
CP3204, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 121
CP3232, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fax number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CP3232, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FCC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
CP3232, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41–42
Features
CQX panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
16×16 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
CQX router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
16×16 remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
CQX router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
16×16 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
CQX router, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
16×2 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
CR0808-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
16×4 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
CR1604-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
16×4 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
CR1616-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
1RU router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
CR1616-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2RU router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
CR16-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
32×32 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41–42
CR3204-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
32×4 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
CR3204-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
32×4 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
CR3232-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8×8 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
CR3232-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
compact router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
CR32-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
RP16 and CP1616 assembly, front and top views . 142
CR6400 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
RP16, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
CRSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
RP16, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
RP16, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figures
RP16, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
16×16 3Gig, HD, SD, AES router, rear view . . . . . . . 129
RP32 and CP3232 assembly, front and top views . 158
16×16 control panel (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
RP32, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
16×16 remote panel module (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
RP32, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
16×16 router, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–10
RP32, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
16×16 router, rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–11
RP32, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
16×2 CQX router, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
RP32, top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
16×2 CQX router, rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
16×4 router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Dynamic port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
16×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
1RU router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 128
1RU router, rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . 26–30, 33–34
E 1RU router, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–28
2RU router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . 30–31, 146
EC9700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 2RU router, rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . 31–33, 35
EC9710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 2RU router, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 32×32 control panel (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114–115 32×32 remote panel module (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 32×32 router, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
E-mail address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 32×32 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

184
 CR Series
User’s Guide

32×32 router, rear view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11 FPGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 88, 98, 102, 105
32×4 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8×8 router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 France, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8×8 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23, 36–38, 85
block diagram, AES router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
block diagram, analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
block diagram, analog video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
block diagram, CQX digital video router . . . . . . . . . . 14
G
block diagram, digital audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Go to Next View, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
block diagram, digital video router . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 16
Go to Previous View, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
block diagram, machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Grounding terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 42, 48, 50
CP0808, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 45
CP0808, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CP1602, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CP1602, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CP1602-CQX, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CP1604, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 H
CP1604, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 42
CP1616, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Hardware symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
CP1616, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39–40 hazardous substance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CP1616, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
CP1616, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 HD routers . . . . 3–4, 12, 26, 30, 32, 125, 128–131, 146–148
CP3204, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 HD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
CP3232, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 72, 81
CP3232, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CP3232, front view (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23 High tally . . . . . . . . . .2, 22–23, 37–38, 86, 91, 100, 108, 177
CP3232, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41–42 Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CQX control panel (photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Hours of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CQX panel (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 How to
CQX router, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 install the router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49
CQX router, rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 perform a take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 103
CQX router, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Hyperlinks, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CR0808-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
CR1604-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CR1616-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 I
CR1616-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CR16-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Initial control panel state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CR3204-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Initial I/O mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CR3204-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
CR3232-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 81
CR3232-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 14, 16
CR32-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Inputs, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 50
RP16 and CP1616 assembly, front and top views . 142 Installation
RP16, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 design considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
RP16, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
RP16, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 receiving and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
RP16, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 stand-alone router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
RP32 and CP3232 assembly, front and top views . 158 Installing a compact router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49
RP32, front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Installing CRConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
RP32, front view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53–56, 59–60, 169, 177
RP32, rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
RP32, rear view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
RP32, top view (drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Find, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 K
First Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Formats, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Knurled screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 42

185
Index

L Non-reclocking routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4, 12, 128, 146

Non-volatile memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 25, 42
NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 116, 126
Last Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NV compact router Ethernet (protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
LED, power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 42, 110
NV9000 6–7, 23, 47, 58–59, 71, 83, 87, 93, 95, 97, 101, 168
Legends, button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–49, 72, 81
router control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 46, 168–171
Level buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 106
router control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Level selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 105
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Level, physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
NV9000 networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 58, 68, 161
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53–56, 59–60, 75
NV9000 Status GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
NV9000-SE Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 45, 159, 163, 169
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 90, 99, 104, 107, 168
NV920, system controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
destination . . . . . . . . 22–23, 38, 85–86, 91–92, 99–100,
NV960, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104–105, 107–108
system controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23, 38, 85, 91, 99, 104, 107
NV96xx control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47, 169
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Loss of reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 O
Low tally . . . 2, 22–23, 37–38, 85–86, 91, 99, 104, 107, 177
Office hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
M Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Machine control router . . . 5, 19, 25, 29, 35, 37, 50, 85, 90,
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 81
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 136, 146, 153, 172
reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 16, 178
Machine control router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview, CR series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Machine control routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 173
Machine control takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 90
Maintenance, preventive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 88, 98, 102, 105, 159 P
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36–38
initial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
RJ45 to DE9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 172 PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 116, 126
Mask, subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Panel button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20–21 Panel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Memory, non-volatile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 25, 42 Panel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Middle East, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Panel IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Miranda Panel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23, 38, 85, 91, 99, 104, 107, 177
technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Panel, captive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Miranda, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Panel, control .2–4, 6, 12, 14, 16–19, 21–23, 25, 35, 37–42,
Mode . . . . 45, 47–49, 72, 80, 91, 107, 109, 142, 158, 173
data reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 NV96xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47, 169
Modules, remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 178 Panel, remote . . . 2–5, 24, 42–43, 45, 49, 53–55, 57–59, 91,
Mono AES switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18, 171, 178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140–142, 156–158
Multi-level take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 106 Panels, control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 15
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
N PDF documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Photos
Network
16×16 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 42
16×16 remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 52–55, 88–89, 105–106
16×16 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–10
Network address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
16×16 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–11
Networks, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 58, 68, 161
16×2 CQX router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Next Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
16×2 CQX router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

186
 CR Series
User’s Guide

32×32 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23 Reference, loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

32×32 remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Reference video . . 12, 14, 16–19, 25, 48, 50, 71–72, 79, 81,
32×32 router, front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 126
32×32 router, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11 termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 50
CP1602-CQX front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
CP1616 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Remote panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CP3232 front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23 Remote panel module . . . . . 2–5, 24, 42–43, 45, 49, 53–55,
CQX control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57–59, 91, 140–142, 156–158
power cord retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Physical level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Remote panel module (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Physical specifications Remote panel modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 74, 173, 178
analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
analog video router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118–119 Revision, document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–50, 172
digital audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118–119 RJ-45 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 35, 50
digital video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118–119 RJ45-to-DE9 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 172
machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 RoHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Rotary switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 25, 42, 47, 49, 57, 72, 80
Pinout, RJ-45 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 9, 45
Port (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 16×16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Port connectors, RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 16×16, 3Gig, HD, SD, AES, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Port pinout, RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 16×4, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Port routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 16×4, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
see machine control router 1RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 39
Port, controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 35, 51, 85, 172 1RU, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Port, controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 35, 51, 85, 172 1RU, rear view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–30, 33–34
Port, dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 1RU, top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–28
Port, RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 35, 50 2RU, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–31
Ports, router and panel network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 2RU, rear view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31–33, 35
Power connectors . . . . . . . . 25, 42, 50, 84, 88, 98, 102, 105 2RU, top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34
Power cord retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 175 32×32, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 32×4, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114–115 3Gig video . . . . 3–4, 12, 26, 30, 32, 125, 128–131, 143,
Power supply . . . 45, 71, 80, 84, 88, 98, 102, 105, 109–110, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 175 8×8, front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
choose 1 or 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 80 8×8, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 42, 110 AES . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 17–18, 26, 30, 32, 36–37, 128–131,
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 88, 98–99, 102, 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148
Preface analog audio . . . . . . 3–4, 19, 25, 28, 33–34, 37, 50, 121,
about PDF documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 133–135, 146, 151–152, 171
chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 analog video . . . . . . . . 3–4, 17, 26–27, 32–33, 119, 128,
terms, conventions and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130–132, 146, 149–150
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–49
Previous Page, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 asynchronous, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
Primary level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 CQX digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 143–144
PS1, PS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 84, 88, 98, 102, 105 CR0808-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
CR1604-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CR1616-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
R CR1616-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CR16-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
CR3204-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rack mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CR3204-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Rate, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CR3232-AA, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Receiving and unpacking shipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CR3232-AV, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 16, 125, 178
CR32-PR, rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 42, 84, 88, 98, 102, 105, 109

187
Index

digital audio . . . .3–4, 17–18, 32, 36–37, 119, 128–129,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148
S
digital video . . . .3–4, 12–13, 16, 26, 32, 118, 128–129,
Safeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148
Safety notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
HD . . . . . . . 3–4, 12, 26, 30, 32, 125, 128–131, 146–148
Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
SB0033 (installation disk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Screws, knurled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 42
inputs, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50
SD routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 30, 32, 128, 146
machine control . .5, 19, 25, 29, 35, 37, 50, 85, 90, 128,
SD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 146, 153, 172
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 72, 81
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
network operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 42
SD video router . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 12, 125, 129–131, 146–148
non-reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 12
Search, Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selection buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Server, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
SD . . . . . . . 3–4, 12, 26, 30, 32, 125, 128–131, 146–148
Setup NV9000 remote panel (page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
SD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20–21
stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
synchronous, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
Software and documentation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Router and panel network, port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Software license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Router control system . . . 6, 47, 49, 83, 87, 93, 95, 97, 101
Source (defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 46, 50, 168–171
Source buttons . . . . . . . . 21–23, 36–37, 84–86, 91, 99–100
Router control systems, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Special messages, symbol for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Router network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52–55, 88–89, 105–106
Specifications
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 5
analog audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3Gig video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
analog video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
analog audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
analog video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
CQX digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
physical, analog audio router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
physical, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
digital video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172–173
physical, machine control router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
physical, remote panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Routers, audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
physical, router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118–119
Routers, machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Routers, stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 79
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114–115
Routers, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
video reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Routing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 99, 103
SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
RP16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 4, 24, 43, 140–142, 173
Stand-alone network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65–66, 87, 105
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Stand-alone router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 63, 83, 97, 102
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Stand-alone routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 79
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 88, 98, 102, 105
RP32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 4, 24, 43, 156–158
Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
front and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Status GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
front view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Stereo AES switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Strap, power cord retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 175
rear and top views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Subnet address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53–55, 57, 59
rear view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
top view, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Support, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
RS-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 29, 35, 42, 50, 122, 172
SWB (super wide band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 46, 125, 178
RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 122
Switch, Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55, 58, 87, 105, 169
Switch, rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 25, 42, 47, 49, 57, 72, 80

188
 CR Series
User’s Guide

Switching Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 178 Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
mono, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
stereo, AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Symbols
for examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
U
for special messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
UniConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Symbols, meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
United Kingdom, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Sync, reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Update remote panel (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Synchronous AES router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–18
Use DHCP (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
System controller
User’s guide, chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NV920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NV960 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

V
T Velcro strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 175
Video
Tables
analog specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
analog audio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
analog video specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
digital specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
digital audio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
reference . . . . 12, 14, 16–19, 25, 48, 50, 71–72, 79, 81,
digital video specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 126
environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
reference, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
physical specifications, analog audio router . . . . . 119
reference, termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 50
physical specifications, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
router, 3Gig . . . 3–4, 12, 26, 30, 32, 125, 128–131, 143,
physical specifications, machine control router . . 120
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148, 178
physical specifications, remote panel module . . . 121
router, analog . . . . . . . 3–4, 17, 26–27, 32–33, 119, 128,
physical specifications, router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118–119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130–132, 146, 149–150, 172–173
power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
router, CQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 143–144, 172–173
power specifications, power supply . . . . . . . . 114–115
router, digital . . 3–4, 12–13, 16, 26, 32, 118, 128–129,
video reference specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146–148, 172–173
Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 89, 106, 178
router, HD . . . . . 3–4, 12, 125, 128–131, 143, 146–148
machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 90
router, SD . . . . . . 3–4, 12, 125, 128–131, 143, 146–148
multi-level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 106
supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
supported rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
high . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 37–38, 86, 91, 100, 108
Video routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
high or ow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22–23
Virtual levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
low . . . . . . . . . .2, 22–23, 37–38, 85–86, 91, 99, 104, 107
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 191
Telephone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Temperature, operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 W
Template, button legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Termination Warnings, hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
video reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Terms, conventions and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WC0053 breakout cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 171, 174
Testing your installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Third-party automation systems . . . . . . . . . . .6, 25, 46, 122 Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 55, 58
Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

189
Index

190
 Contact Us

Miranda Technical Support

For technical assistance, please contact the Miranda Technical Support center nearest you:

Americas Asia
Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 9:00 p.m. (EST) Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (GMT+8)
Telephone: +1-800-224-7882 Telephone: +852-2539-6987
Fax: +1-514-335-1614 Fax: +852-2539-0804
E-mail: techsupp@[Link] E-mail: asiatech@[Link]

Europe, Middle East, Africa, UK China

Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 6:00 p.m. (GMT) Telephone: +86-10-5873-1814
Telephone: +44 118 952 3444 E-mail: asiatech@[Link]
Fax: +44 118 952 3401
E-mail: eurotech@[Link]

France
Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (GMT+1)
Telephone: +33 1 55 86 87 88
Fax: +33 1 55 86 00 29
E-mail: eurotech@[Link]

Corporate Head Office

Miranda Technologies Inc.
3499 Douglas-B.-Floreani, St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4S 2C6
Telephone: 514-333-1772
Fax: 514-333-9828
Web: [Link]

191